Home

caution - Saturn

1. 5 61 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit s s00ee 5 62 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage 5 70 Changing a Flat Tire 5 70 Removing the Spare Tire ANd Tools 0ceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 71 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 5 74 Service and Appearance Care Secondary Latch System Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools e eseeeeeeees 80 Compact Spare Tire 5 83 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning eee 5 84 Fabric Carpet 0cccceee 5 85 Leather lt 2cheeetes vehessanodnsetenss 5 86 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces 5 86 Care of Safety Belts 5 86 Weatherstrips c seceeeee 5 87 Washing Your Vehicle 5 87 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 2200 5 87 Finish Care csceceseeeeeeees 5 87 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades ces00006 5 88 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim 5 89 MINES semzastatetetceneteces ent tan ee 5 90 Sheet Metal Damage 5 90 Finish Damage essesi 5 90 Underbody Maintenance 5 90 Chemical Paint Spotting 5 90 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification tabal as tecetecccsecsastcceccsaccents 5 91 Electrical System High Voltage Devices and Wiring s 2cccesescesctsdebesacd 5 91 Add On Electrical EqQuIDMENE sescecnaiii n
2. 5 55 Z CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle 5 56 Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 46 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 78 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Service and Appearance Care Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionall
3. 2 52 Second Row Center Console c0ccceeee ee 2 50 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 5 70 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice ON SNOW iesdtiesccac an tiockeh cece 4 17 Sun VISOIS cccccee ee eee ee ee ees 2 16 SUNMOOP samsyn rerni takinan 2 54 T Tachometer ccrisrsisirsirirria 3 32 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Sidemarker Lamps 5 36 Telescopic Wheel 4 3 6 Text Telephone TTY Users 7 5 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 125 Theft Deterrent Systems 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent 2 16 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 6 2 18 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation 2 18 Third Row Seats 068 1 12 Tilt Wheel cccc cece eee 3 6 Time Setting 0 3 74 Tire Pressure Light 3 39 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 5 5 70 TES aana 5 39 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning oeiee 5 89 Buying New Tires 5 54 GAINS maseni snte 5 60 Changing a Flat Tire 5 70 Cleaning einai ions 5 90 Compact Spare a se 5 83 Different Size 0 5 56 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 61 Inflation Tire Pressure 5 45 Tires cont Inspection and Rotation Installing the Spare Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Pressure Monitor System Removing the Flat Tire Removing the Spare Tire
4. Z CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip 1 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear Safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy Seats and Restraint System The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not l
5. Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes Moving too far forward or stepping out of the vehicle can cause the headphones to lose the audio signal For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly Headphones should be worn with the headband over the top of the head for best audio reception The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Instrument Panel 3 115 Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set See your dealer retailer for more information Headphones should be stored in the front floor console and not in the front seat back pocket Headphone damage can occur when the second row seats are folded forward 3 116 Instrument Panel Battery Replacement To cha
6. a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with seat mounted side impact airbags there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Seats and Restraint System Rollover capable roof rail air
7. Entry Lighting For vehicles with courtesy lamps they come on and stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if the vehicle has one If a door is opened the lamps stay on while it is open and then turn off automatically about 20 seconds after the door is closed If the unlock symbol is pressed and no door is opened the lamps turn off after about 20 seconds Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming With theater dimming the lamps do not turn off at the end of the delay time Instead they slowly dim and then go out The delay time is canceled if the ignition key is turned to ON RUN or the power door lock switch is pressed The lamps will dim right away When the ignition is on illuminated entry is inactive which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless a door is opened Delayed Entry Lighting Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a period of time after all the doors have been closed The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to work Immediately after all the doors have been closed the delayed entry lighting feature continues to work until one of the following occurs e The ignition is in ON RUN e The doors are locked An illumination period of about 25 seconds has elapsed If during the illumination period a door is opened the timed illumination period is canceled and the interior
8. To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press Jd for more than two seconds until a beep sounds Radios with CD and DVD fade differently depending on the DVD Media type e With DVD A 5 1 Surround media the left front and right front speakers fade rearward leaving the center front speakers unaffected until the last fade step then all front speakers mute e With DVD V 5 1 Surround media surround sound is maintained until Step 4 of the Fade control is reached while fading rearward At that point the audio system output changes to Stereo to prevent the loss of Center channel output when the full rearward fade position is reached If the Rear Seat Audio RSA is turned on the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category 1 Press BAND until the XM frequency displays Press CAT to display the category labels Continue pressing CAT until the desired category name displays e Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the category list by pressing REV or FWD Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 5 To go to the next or previous XM station within the selected category do one of the following
9. To switch between English and metric measurements see UNITS later in this section TRIP A or TRIP B Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A or TRIP B displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for each trip odometer Both trip odometers can be used at the same time Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip Instrument Panel 3 51 To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc If the re
10. for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing lt phone name gt e The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the number to send e If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues e Ifthe system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed
11. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone TTY can communicate with Saturn by dialing 1 800 TDD 6000 TTY users in Canada may dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Information 7 5 Customer Assistance Offices Saturn encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a customer wishes to write to Saturn the letter should be addressed to Saturn Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33173 Detroit MI 48232 5173 1 800 553 6000 1 800 833 6000 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 553 6000 In Canada write to Saturn Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Ltd CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 GMcanada com 1 800 263 1999 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 7 6 Customer Assistance Information GM Mobility Reimbursement Program FE MOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward eligible aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle such as hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn Customer Assistance Center
12. Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to the previous menu 3 56 Instrument Panel DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays when there is a compact spa
13. Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph 40 km h or greater press the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to increase the vehicle speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it e To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the lower speed desired is reached then release it e To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and th
14. The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tread area of the tire It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire If the tire has been separated from the wheel has damaged sidewalls or has a large puncture the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions This vehicle may have one of the following tire sealant and compressor kits The kit includes Service and Appearance Care 5 63 A Selector Switch Sealant Air or Air Only B On Off Button C Pressure Gage D Pressure Deflation Button If equipped E Tire Sealant Canister F Sealant Air Hose Clear G Air Only Hose Black H Power Plug Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer retailer See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following There is only enough sealant to seal one tire After usage the sealant canister and sealant air hose assembly must be replaced See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister foll
15. The vehicle can be started with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off To avoid setting off the alarm by accident e Lock the vehicle with the door key after the doors are closed e Unlock the door with the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way sets off the alarm if the system has been armed Press i or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START to turn off the alarm Features and Controls 2 17 Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver side window and open the driver door 2 Press 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 92 If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash see your dealer retailer for service 2 18 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may no
16. The vehicle has seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 47 Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Seats and Restraint System Seat mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts A seat mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over or in a severe frontal impact In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In
17. cccccceeeee cece ees OVEIVIEW 22 ccc cc cece cece eee ees Storage Area 008 Introduction ccceeee eee ee Jump Starting K Keyless Entry Remote Operation ceeee eee 2 4 Keyless Entry System 2 3 Keys aeia aae REN 2 2 L Labeling Tire Sidewall 5 40 Lamp Malfunction Indicator 3 39 Lamps Courtesy miraririn 3 13 DOME sisi cdivdveradinsiecaaiiens 3 14 Dome Lamp Override 3 14 License Plate 068 5 37 Reading sics2isiliscssmtamensseea 3 15 Lap Shoulder Belt 1 23 LATCH System for Child Restraints 1 37 Liftgate Carbon Monoxide 2 10 Liftgate Power 0 2 11 Lighting Delayed Entry acae 3 14 Delayed Exit 0 3 15 ENUY sumen S 3 14 Parade Dimming 3 15 Lights Airbag Readiness 3 33 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 37 Brake System Warning 3 36 Charging System 3 35 Cruise Control 000 3 43 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 3 38 Exterior Lamps 3 11 Flash to Pass eeee 3 7 Fog LAMP ictsscsnnteeneascs isesi 3 43 Highbeam On nasses 3 43 High Low Beam Changer 3 7 Oil Pressure ceeeeee 3 42 Passenger Airbag Status INCIGALO ainas iia 3 34 Safety Belt Reminders 3 32 S CUMILY darrere tenrian 3
18. Compass Calibration Procedure following Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass To calibrate the compass use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls seats etc during the calibration procedure Instrument Panel 3 55 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays
19. Service and Appearance Care 5 53 Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle Continued In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 Make sure the spare tire if the vehicle has one is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 80 5 54 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires a 4713 ES i eg G NNNHN ES t ee Se ee ete I r 71 pey i Lat ia pal Por 2 rT aad Latent 7c A a a hash i beast mam Ty aaa S Ewa h A i 4 TETT A e GEE F E YT AER habl hiak adai aliad One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when the tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Service and Appearance Care You need new tires if any of the f
20. Service and Appearance Care Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring syste
21. with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Features and Controls Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons 2 49 Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote buttons repeat the programming instructions earlier in this section beginning with Step 2 For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 2 50 Storage Areas Glove Box Lift the glove box handle up to open it Use the key to lock an
22. Exhaust on page 2 30 If the vehicle has a power liftgate see Power Liftgate on page 2 11 To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the RKE transmitter twice See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 To open the liftgate press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle The vehicle must be in P Park to open the liftgate To close the liftgate use the pull cup or strap The liftgate has an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftgate will not open The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage and the liftgate still will not function the vehicle should be taken to a dealers retailer for service Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Z CAUTION Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate trunk hatch open or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk hatch or liftgate Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk hatch open e Close all of the windows e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Continued Features and Controls 2 11 CAUTION Co
23. Instrument Panel 3 101 Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player 3 102 Instrument Panel If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information If
24. The vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 35 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 34 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Seats and Restraint System 1 45 Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Continued Secure rear facing child restraints in
25. Windshield Washer Flash to Pass Feature Information for these features is on the pages following For information on the headlamps see Exterior Lamps on page 3 11 Turn and Lane Change gt An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is completed If the lever is briefly pressed and released the turn signal flashes three times The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on a signal bulb might be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 92 Turn Signal On Chime If either one of the turn signals are left on and the vehicle has been driven more than 3 4 mile 1 2 km a chime will sound Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Push the turn signal multifunction lever away from you to turn the high beams on Pull the lever towards you to return to low beams This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel cluster when the high beam headlamps are on Flash to Pass With the turn signal lever in the low beam position pull the lever toward yo
26. folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists Instrument Panel 3 93 or sessions To play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off e Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player Change playlists by using lt and gt folder buttons the JJ knob or the SEEK arrows An MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW that was recorded using no file folders can be played If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and a combined total of 512 folders and files the player accesses and navigates up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible 3 94 Instrument Panel Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory displays as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 WMA files
27. l To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt Fast Forward Press to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release PP This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Py Audio Press to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Subtitles Press to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source Camera Press to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection lt j Clear Press within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numerical inputs Z 10 Double Digit Entries Press to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this button before entering the number If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote contro
28. 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 4 Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 24 5 If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information 6 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull the stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants Seats and Restraint System To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop on the side wall Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on
29. 3 54 Instrument Panel DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center DIC Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory Your dealer retailer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it when the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays 2 Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available 3 Press the set reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone 4 Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC 5 If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See
30. 4 5 StabiliTrak System 65 4 5 All Wheel Drive AWD SYSTEM ardeii 4 8 SCE E 4 8 Off Road Recovery 4 9 PASSING sscetmaccswactavoncduacs ccna 4 10 Loss of Control eseeeeee es 4 10 Driving at Night 05 4 11 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Before Leaving on a LONG Tip eee eee ee ee ee eee eee Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out eccceeecicsscnceccesicd Loading the Vehicle Towing Towing Your Vehicle Recreational Vehicle Towing Towing a Trailer Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible e Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly e Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops e Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time e When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped e Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require e Keep vehicle tires properly inflated 4 2 Driving Your Vehicle e Combine several trips into a single trip e Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size e Follow recommended scheduled maintenance Defensive Driving Defensive driving mean
31. All wheel drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the ground To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front Dolly Towing Front Wheel Drive Vehicles Only Ba z man m iaa Vama an a O To tow a front wheel drive vehicle from the front with two wheels on the ground 1 Put the front wheels on a dolly 2 Move the shift lever to P Park 3 Set the parking brake 4 Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing 5 Remove the key from the ignition 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly 7 Release the parking brake Towing the Vehicle From the Rear Driving Your Vehicle 4 25 Notice Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it Also repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never have the vehicle towed from the rear Do not tow the vehicle from the rear 4 26 Towing a Trailer Driving Your Vehicle Z CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if a
32. DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button Instrument Panel 3 89 gt il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD e lf the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode e If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode lt Group P Press to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus d Audio Stream Press to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD A disc The video screen shows the audio stream changing 3 90 Instrument Panel Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and shows Loading Disc on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed either by the softkey on the radio or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control It may take up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing Stoppi
33. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 60 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Service and Appearance Care 5 5 Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking
34. Park the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 34 for more information UNITS Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Instrument Panel 3 47 If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs
35. URPA For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it operates at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R Reverse The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet 2 5 m behind the vehicle and at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground Z CAUTION The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision It cannot detect e objects that are below the bumper underneath the vehicle or if they are too close or far from the vehicle e children pedestrians bicyclists or pets If you do not use proper care before and while backing vehicle damage injury or death could occur Even with URPA always check behind the vehicle before backing up While backing be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle s mirrors The display is located in the headliner and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder URPA uses three color coded lights to provide distance and system information Features and Controls 2 35 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h If the vehicle is above this speed the red light on the rear display flashes To be detected ob
36. Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 5 85 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning proce
37. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Features and Controls 2 45 This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 46 Universal Home Remot
38. a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R or CD RW disc contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not display on a CD R or CD RW disc that was recorded without folders or playlists When the CD R or CD RW disc contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW disc are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first
39. capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 39 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section Driving Your Vehicle 4 19 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 4 20 Driving Your Vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available
40. cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips Ms A B 4AA i Example 1 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 1 000 lbs 453 kg B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 300 Ibs 136 kg C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg e C Example 2 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 1 000 Ibs 453 kg B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 750 Ibs 340 kg C Available Cargo Weight 250 Ibs 113 kg Example 3 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 1 000 lbs 453 kg B Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 91 kg x 5 1 000 Ibs 453 kg C Available Cargo Weight 0 Ibs 0 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label Label Example A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s
41. comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head 1 26 There is a guide for each outboard passenger position in the second row seat and all passenger positions in the third row Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 1 Outboard Positions For the outboard positions remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body For the third row center position locate the comfort guide which is located in a storage pocket at the top of the seat under the headrest on the driver s side of the vehicle To access the Seats and Restraint System comfort guide you will first need to move the headrest forward by pulling on the handle behind the seatback The comfort guide will now be accessible ia Third Row Center Position Pull the comfort guide out of its storage location and then return the headrest to its upright position The elastic cord on the comfort guide is adjustable You can make it longer or shorter by squeezing both ends of the plastic adjuster GAG 404 ih i 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 27 Seats and Restraint System 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top
42. e The ignition is in the ON RUN position e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e The engine is running When the DRL are on the regular headlamps taillamps sidemarker and other lamps will not be on The instrument panel and cluster will also not be lit For vehicles with HID headlamps if the DRL are on and the left or right turn signal lamp is turned on the left or right DRL will go off The headlamps automatically change from DRL to the regular headlamps depending on the darkness of the surroundings The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also come on When it is bright enough outside the headlamps will go off and the DRL will come on The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument panel because it works with the DRL Fog Lamps 20 Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the button is located on the exterior lamps control The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The ignition must be in the ON RUN position for the fog lamps to come on Press 40 to turn the fog lamps on or off A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster When the headlamps are changed to high beam the fog lamps also go off Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Instrument Panel 3 13 Instrument Panel Brightne
43. e Turn e Press the buttons below the right or left arrows on the display e Press either SEEK arrow 6 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label Instrument Panel 3 81 3 Turn J to display the category to be removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h 3 82 Instrument Panel Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an er
44. feature the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Instrument Panel 3 117 Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position To use the video screen 1 Push the release button located on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on this is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Press O on the remote control or eject the disc to turn off the screen The infrared receivers for the wireless headphones and the remote control are located at the rear of the overhead console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information 3 118 Instrument Panel Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be wo
45. manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments Lower Anchors Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH 1 37 seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B Top Tether Anchor A Pa J F 7 F r A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash 1 38 Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restra
46. noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information 5 6 California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 lf this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Service and Appearance Care Additives To provide cle
47. operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling Customer Assistance Information This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identify
48. or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has
49. or B about 10 5 inches 27 cm from the rear tire The triangle is located near each wheel on the vehicle s exterior Notice f a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly the vehicle could be damaged When raising the vehicle on a jack avoid contact with the rear axle control arms 5 Do not raise the vehicle yet Put the compact spare tire near you Z CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Service and Appearance Care Z CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 6 Attach the lug wrench to the jack and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head 3 inches 7 6 cm 5 75 A he wa 1 ae g R i 3i z oy 7 Place the jack under the vehicle as identified in Step 3 Raise the vehicle by turning the lug wrench clockwise in the jack Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so that there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well 8 Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire 5 76 Service and Appearance Care 9 Remove the plas
50. s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel A Next Press to go to the next radio station stored as a favorite or the next track if a CD DVD is playing CD V Previous End Press to go to the previous radio station stored as a favorite the next track if a CD DVD is playing to reject an incoming call or end a current call amp w amp Mute Push to Talk Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 42 and Bluetooth on page 3 103 in this manual for more information 3 126 Instrument Panel SRCE Source Press to switch between the radio AM FM XM CD and for vehicles with DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary For vehicles with the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information lt lt Volume Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume DI Seek Press to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM Press bl to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press the D if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player Radio Reception Frequency interference a
51. set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Instrument Panel 3 73 Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is shifted out of P Park e The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made 3 74 Instrument Panel Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features Z CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicl
52. the center seatback This anchor should be used for the center seating position only Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor 1 40 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 35 for additional information Seats and Restraint System Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Do not attach more than one child restra
53. with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting Some models may have an internal thermostat in the cord which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver side of the engine compartment It is routed around the windshield washer fluid reservoir 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 2 23 Z CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this 2 24 Automatic Transmission Operation The automatic transmission has a shift lever located on the console between the seats P Park This position locks the fro
54. 1 FAN 2 FOG LAMP Fuel System Control HORN Heated Windshield HTD WASH washer Fluid 5 96 HTD MIR HVAC BLWR LT HI BEAM LT LO BEAM LT PRK LT TRLR STOP TRN ODD COILS PCM IGN PWR L GATE PWR OUTLET Heated Outside Rearview Mirror Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Blower Left High Beam Headlamp Left Low Beam Headlamp Left Parking Lamp Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Odd Injector Coils Powertrain Control Module Ignition Power Liftgate Power Outlet Service and Appearance Care Fuses Usage ca Rear Accessory RR APO Power Outlet RR DEFOG Rear Defogger Rear Climate Sn Control System RT HI Right High Beam BEAM Headlamp RT LO Right Low Beam BEAM Headlamp RT PRK Right Parking Lamp RT TRLR Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn STOP TRN Signal Regulated Voltage S ROOF SPARE Stop Lamps Stop Lamps a China Only STRTR Transmission Control Module TRANS TRLR Trailer Back up BCK UP_ Lamps TRLR BRK Trailer Brake TRLR PRK Trailer Parking LAMP Lamps TRLR PWR Windshield WPR WSW Wiper Washer Relays Usage pn eok Air Conditioning CLTCH Compressor Clutch PUMP Pump High Beam High Intensity HID LO Discharge HID BEAM Low Beam Headlamps HORN Ignition Main Relays LT TRLR STOP TRN PRK LAMP PWR TRN RR DEFOG RT TRLR STOP TRN Stop Lamps China Only TRLR BCK UP WPR WPR HI Service
55. 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 17 Change automatic transmission fluid severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid normal service All wheel drive vehicles Change transfer case fluid Severe service See footnote m All wheel drive vehicles Change transfer case fluid normal service Maintenance Schedule 6 7 Additional Required Services cont d A 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80000 120 000 160000 200 000 240 000 Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote k Maintenance Footnotes a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment b Visually inspect front and rear suspension a
56. 43 StabiliTrak Indicator 3 37 Tire Pressure 000 3 39 Tow Haul Mode 3 43 Loading Your Vehicle 4 18 Locks Delayed Locking 4 2 8 DOOF Gets rnin cherie da cae EE 2 8 Lockout Protection 2 9 Locks cont Power Door ce0eeeeee 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door LOCKS risers eer 2 9 Rear Door Security Locks 2 9 Loss of Control 685 4 10 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 37 Luggage Carrier 000 2 52 Lumbar Manual Controls 6 1 4 Power Controls 1 5 M Maintenance FOOtUNOtES 2ics ssc scaeiecceieverecds 6 7 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ccceeeeeee eee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill 6 9 At Least Once a Month 6 10 At Least Once a Year 6 10 Maintenance Record 6 16 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Maintenance Requirements 6 1 Maintenance Schedule cont Owner Checks and Services cccceeeee cece es 6 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 000 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance 6 3 SING Misirin ionn aadi 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0065 6 1 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 39 Manual Lumbar Controls 1 4 Manual Seats cccceeeeee 1 3 Memory Seat and Mirrors 1 6 Message DIC Warnings and Messag
57. 5 94 Windshield Wiper 5 92 G Gage Speedometer 0655 3 32 Tachometer 2 2 008 3 32 Voltmeter Gage 00 3 35 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature sasinen 3 38 FUG eiaa caniae anis 3 44 Garage Door Opener 2 45 Gasoline Octane ices ince ics a necdis iE 5 5 Specifications 0e 5 5 INDEX i 5 Glove BOX wrsiictiviiia navies 2 50 GM Mobility Reimbursement Progra 3 cieieteccievensawcdeceeccd 7 6 H Halogen Bulbs 0 4 5 36 Hazard Warning Flashers 3 5 Head Restraints 005 1 2 Headlamp AIMING isdides tds ceceien tinaas 5 35 Headlamps Bulb Replacement 5 35 Daytime Running Lamps Automatic Headlamp System 3 12 Delayed ccceeeee neers 3 12 Exterior Lamps 4 3 11 Flash to Pass ivciracsisiani 3 7 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 36 High Low Beam Changer 3 7 Heated Seats cceeeeeeeeees 1 5 Heater a eee re 3 19 Engine Coolant 2 23 Height Adjuster Driver Seat 1 3 i 6 INDEX High Voltage Devices and Wiring Highbeam On Light Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Hood Checking Things Under Release Horn How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Ignition Positions Infants and Young Children Restraints Inflation Tire Pressure Instrument Panel Brightness Cluster
58. Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blade
59. ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button 3 50 Instrument Panel TIMER Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed FUEL USED Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed AVG Average SPEED Press the trip fuel button until AVG SPEED displays This display shows the average speed of the ve
60. Engine Oil Life System on page 5 15 PARK ASSIST To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system press the trip odometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays This display allows the system to be turned on or off Once in this display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select between ON or OFF If you choose ON the system will be turned on If you choose OFF the system will be turned off The URPA system automatically turns back on after each vehicle start When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 34 for more information RELEARN REMOTE KEY To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle This procedure will erase all previously learned transmitters Therefore they must be relearned as additional transmitters To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter a
61. OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most Features and Controls vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar After the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week OnStar
62. Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only 6 11 e To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit check the sealant expiration date printed on the instruction label of the kit at least once a year See your dealer retailer for a replacement canister 6 12 Maintenance Schedule Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst g symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page
63. Poor handling Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards 5 45 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry 5 46 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire if the vehicle has one It should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 83 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km
64. RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more information Instrument Panel 3 87 Playing a DVD J Tune Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also see Setting the Clock in the index for setting the clock and date K SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press again to go to the previous track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SEEK gt Next Track Chapter Press to go to the next track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 88 Instrument Panel lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press to quickly reverse the DVD at five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press again This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews bb FWD Fast Forward Press to fast forward the DVD The radio displays the el
65. The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones 3 104 Instrument Panel Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 125 for more information amp w amp Push To Talk Press to answer
66. United States Government Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems eeeee Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Retained Accessory Power RAP 08 Roadside Assistance PHOQKANN esera Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out siaina as Roof Sunroof Running the Vehicle While Parked INDEX S Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belts Care of Extender How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Lap Shoulder Belt Safety Belts Are for Everyone Use During Pregnancy Safety Defects Reporting to Saturn Reporting to the Canadian Government 5655 Reporting to the United States Government Safety Warnings and Symbols Scheduled Maintenance Additional Required Services Scheduling Appointments Sealant Kit Tire i 10 INDEX Seats Driver Seat Height Adjuster 1 3 Head Restraints 0 1 2 Heated Seats 0cce ee 1 5 Manual Lumbar 1 4 Memory Mirrors 5 1 6 Power Lumbar 1 5 Power Seats c0cceeeeee 1 4 Rear Seat Operation 1 9 Reclining Seatbacks 1 8 Third Row Seat 1 12 Second Row Center Console cccceee cece ee ea ees 2 50 Secondary Latch System 5 78 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position 1 43 Right Front Seat Position 1 45 Security Light e 3 4
67. Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet to change the direction of the air flow Use the thumbwheel near the outlet to control the amount of air flow or to shut off the airflow Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best system performance Instrument Panel 3 27 Operation Tips e Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle e Use of non GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system e Keep the path under all seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more effectively e If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi level modes with mild temperature throughout the vehicle turn on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging 3 28 Instrument Panel Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System B A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control For vehicles with the rear climate control system the controls are located on the rear of the center console The system can also be controlled with the front controls Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off An indicator comes on when the rear system is on The system also turns on if any of the rear controls are adjusted Mimic Mode This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control sett
68. a MP3 WMA is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information
69. a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone Instrument Panel 3 111 To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone press for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle 3 112 Instrument Panel Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold amp
70. across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane e Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident e Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions When driving through deep snow turn off the traction control part of the StabiliTrak System to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 4 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery road
71. and the page number where it can be found 2008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning Z CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read these cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Preface iii Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator CA This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or informatio
72. at 1 800 553 6000 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 6000 In Canada customers may call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at 1 800 263 1999 TTY users in Canada may call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 553 6000 Text Telephone TTY 1 800 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if the
73. back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than ten seconds have played This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press or I to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold K or to perform a cursor left or right on the menu PROG Program Press to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing press PROG to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc 3 125 Instrument Panel When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press PROG to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press PROG to perform the ENTER menu function Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle
74. can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files The radio plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc MP3 WMA Format Creating an MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc e The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists anda combined total of 512 folders and files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or aloum should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file
75. can be used again If the liftgate comes across more obstacles on the same power cycle the power function deactivates and you must manually open or close the liftgate A message displays LIFTGATE OPEN to indicate that the liftgate is open See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 44 for more information After removing the obstructions manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position The liftgate resumes normal power operation Pinch sensors are located on the side edges of the liftgate If an object is caught between the liftgate and the vehicle and presses against this sensor the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle Manual Operation of Power Liftgate T Y oy OFF lt To change the liftgate to manual operation press the switch on the center console to OFF With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors unlocked the liftgate can be manually opened and closed Features and Controls 2 13 To open the liftgate press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open To close the liftgate use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close The liftgate latch will power close Always close the liftgate before driving If the RKE button
76. connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Service and Appearance Care 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move 5 33 The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal for this purpose 10 Now start the vehicle with the WAL good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs serv
77. dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key Features and Controls 2 19 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of the original key being turned to the LOCK OFF position The security light turns off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If the PASS Key III key is lost or damaged see your dealer retailer or a locksmith to have a new key made The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for additional information Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 2 20 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines If you have all wheel drive keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Features and Controls Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
78. eject press and hold amp DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject fi Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing K SEEK Press K to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds on the CD have played Press BI to go to the next track For Radios with CD and DVD press K to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds on the CD have played If less than five seconds on the CD have played the previous track plays Press P to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound will be heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound will be heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random CD tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order with the random setting To use random press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for f
79. engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Variable Effort Steering If the vehicle has this steering system the system continuously adjusts the effort felt when steering at all vehicle speeds It provides ease when parking yet a firm solid feel at highway speeds Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in acurve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergenc
80. firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked in P Park Torque Lock Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P Park is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P Park To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park To find out how see Shifting Into Park listed previously If torque lock does occur your vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure so you can shift out of P Park Shifting Out of Park The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to e Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and
81. fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Maintenance Schedule 6 9 Engine Oil Level Check Notice Itis important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 13 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 19 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fl
82. going Z CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats e Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle e When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can e Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before recreationa
83. head restraint press the release button located on the head restraint post on the top of the seatback while you push the head restraint down Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place Front Seats Manual Seats Z CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the drivers seat only when the vehicle is not moving Seats and Restraint System 1 3 ey k i r c z Ad f yy i I I A E A Manual Seat Adjustment Bar B Driver Seat Height Adjuster See Seat Height Adjuster on page 1 3 C Manual Reclining Seatback Lever See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 8 If the vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can adjust the seat forward or rearward with the bar located under the front of the seat cushion Lift the bar to unlock the seat Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Seat Height Adjuster If the vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster it is located on the outboard side of the seat See Manual Seats on page 1 3 for more information To raise the seat move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height To l
84. information AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock Instrument Panel 3 67 DRIVER
85. information about OnStar and how to subscribe to it See OnStar System on page 2 42 for more information about the services OnStar provides D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera RVC See Rear Vision Camera RVC on page 2 37 for more information If the vehicle has RVC the button will not be available 2 32 Features and Controls Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water Outside Power Mirrors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver door armrest To adjust each mirror 1 Press A or B to select the driver or passenger side mirror 2 Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror 3 Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen 4 Press either A or B again to deselect the mirror Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position Using hood mounted air deflector
86. installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 48 for additional information 5 48 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Service and Appearance Care Vehicles with TPMS operate ona radio frequency and comply with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is d
87. is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take the vehicle to the dealer retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 The transmission fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the transmission is at operating temperature If you need to check the transmission fluid level please take the vehicle to your dealer retailer Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature A Engine Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fans Service and Appearance Care 5 19 Z CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Z CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose al
88. lamps remain on Delayed Exit Lighting This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time after the key is removed from the ignition The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work When the key is removed interior illumination activates and remains on until one of the following occurs e The ignition is in ON RUN The power door locks are activated e An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed If during the illumination period a door is opened the timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior lamps will remain on because a door is open Parade Dimming Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of the instrument panel displays during the daylight while the headlamps are on so that the displays are still able to be seen Reading Lamps The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the dome lamp Press the button to turn them on and off Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery Instrument Panel 3 15 When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Dr
89. light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are e One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire if your vehicle has one The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor Service and Appearance Care e The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 54 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPM
90. light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 32 for more information 1 62 Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 86 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 52 See your dealer retailer for service Seats and Restraint System Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Z CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new Safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged
91. month day year to day month year 1 Press and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that displays on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located Radio with CD under the desired option 3 Press again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 3 76 Instrument Panel Radio with CD and DVD The vehicle may have one of these radios as its audio system Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose Surround Sound System Some of its features are explained later in this section under Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system it has a CD DVD radio See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Radio Data System RDS The Radio Data System RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving s
92. off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC LIFTGATE OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 13 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 13 PARK ASSIST OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system after the vehicle has been started and shifted out of P Park this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off Press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ult
93. on page 3 9 for more information DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 3 58 Instrument Panel ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 38 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
94. on the DIC messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 44 los ee The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated The system may be heard or felt while it is working this is normal d el The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the traction control disable button Traction control can be turned on by pressing and releasing the traction control disable button if not automatically shut off for any other reason When the traction control system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate traction control off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver The vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off system noises may be heard and felt as a result of the brake traction control working It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the
95. or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled the lights will flash three times but the liftgate will not move It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open However if you must drive with the liftgate open the liftgate should be set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center console 2 14 Features and Controls Windows Power Windows Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows Uplevel shown base similar The power window controls are located on each of the side doors The driver door also has switc
96. or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC PARK TILT MIRRORS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2 33 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to ac
97. outlets This position unlocks the ignition and steering wheel Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running The transmission is also unlocked in this position If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time Q START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch will return to ON RUN for driving Features and Controls 2 21 Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off e Audio System e Power Windows e Sunroof if equipped Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the driver s door is opened For an additional 10 minutes of operation close all the doors and turn the key to ON RUN and then back to LOCK OFF All these features will work when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY positions 2 22 Features and Controls Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P Park
98. page 3 38 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 25 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 for more information This message displays and a continuous chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 for further information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle shou
99. page 5 87 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 Service and Appearance Care 5 9 If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is not properly installed Z CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it might not fit properly This can cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 5 10 Service and Appearance Care Filling a Portable Fuel Container CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense fuel only into approved containers e Do not fill a con
100. page numbers 4 Press FAV or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Auto Text Satellite Radio Service CD MP3 and WMA features If additional information is available for the current song being played Auto Text will automatically page scroll the information every five seconds above the FAV presets on the radio display To activate Auto Text 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton under AUTO TXT label on the radio display 3 Press the pushbutton under the ON label on the radio display If Lis pressed and the song title or artist information is longer than what can be displayed the extra information will page every five seconds when Auto Text is activated Instrument Panel 3 79 Seiting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble 1 Press Jd until the tone control labels display 2 Continue pressing J to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton under the desired label 3 To adjust the highlighted setting do one of the following until the desired levels are obtained e Turn JI clockwise or counterclockwise Press gt gt FWD or lt lt REV If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease th
101. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 32 for additional information Seats and Restraint System In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 15 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 1 16 Seats and Restraint System Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshiel
102. position Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open If the driver side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock If the passenger side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger door will unlock 2 10 Liftgate Features and Controls Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate trunk hatch open or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk hatch or liftgate Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk hatch open e Close all of the windows e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Continued e Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index e If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine
103. rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification Tire label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper e Will any holes be made in the body o
104. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped 2 25 Features and Controls To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 17 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed Z CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than 35 mph 56 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 56 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down Notice If the vehicle seems to accelerate s
105. row seats can be folded forward or removed Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Seats and Restraint System To fold the seatback 1 Remove anything on or under the seat 2 Disconnect the rear safety belt mini latch using a key in the slot on the mini buckle let the belt retract into the headliner Stow the mini latch in the holder located in the headliner 3 Pull up on the release lever located on the back of the seat The headrest moves forward automatically 4 Push the seatback forward to lay flat To return the seatback to the seating position 1 Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle or by pushing it into place from inside the vehicle 2 The headrest must be locked into place before sitting in the seat Z CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place Seats and Restraint System Z CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the prote
106. see your dealer retailer for service RELEARN REMOTE KEY This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle This procedure will erase all previously learned transmitters Therefore they must be relearned as additional transmitters 3 48 Instrument Panel To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF COMPASS ZONE SETTING This display will be available if the vehicle has a compass See DIC Compass on page 3 54 for more information COMPASS RECALIBRATION This display will be available if the vehicle has a compass See DIC Compass on page 3 54 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information Trip Fuel Menu Items TN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu i
107. see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts To purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When the vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays service is required for the vehicle Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system might not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine
108. sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 60 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates Seats and Restraint System A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger sensing system Here is how e The passenger sensing system may turn off the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the seat If this happens the off indicator will be lit and the airbag readiness light on the instrument panel will also be lit Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in may make it more likely that the passenger sensing system will enable turn on the passenger airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat If the passenger airbag is turned on the on indicator will be lit If the passenger seat gets wet dry the seat immediately If the airbag readiness light is lit do not install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy t
109. solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Z CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Service and Appearance Care Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that ar
110. system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 17 Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If traction control is turned off only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly Notice If the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as h
111. system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 5 13 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 15 PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system press the vehicle information button until PARK ASSIST displays This display allows the system to be turned on or off Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ON or OFF If you choose ON the system will be turned on If you choose OFF the system will be turned off The URPA system automatically turns back on after each vehicle start When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of P
112. tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed 5 29 Battery This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label For battery replacement see your dealer retailer or the service manual To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 30 Vehicle Storage Z CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 30 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black n
113. the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats See Power Lumbar under Power Seats on page 1 4 for more information To increase or decrease lumbar support press and hold the front or rear of the control C Release the control when the seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support The lumbar support may need to be adjusted when changing the seating position Seats and Restraint System 1 5 Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are located on the center console To operate the heated seats the engine must be running Heated Seatback Press to turn on the heated seatback e Heated Seat and Seatback Press to turn on or off the heated seat and seatback The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is on Each time the button is pressed the temperature settings change from high to medium to low to off Indicator lights above the button will show the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The passenger seat may take longer to heat up If the vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started using the remote keyless entry transmitter the front heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is cold outside See Remote Vehicle Start under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 When the ignition is turned on the heated seat feat
114. the three latches at a time to help avoid personal injury and damage to the console Notice Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles 2 51 Floor Mats If the floor mat has a snap retainer a grommet in the driver side floor mat attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle to secure the floor mat To remove the floor mat pull the mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet can be removed from the hook If the floor mat has a knob retainer a grommet in the floor mat attaches to a knob on the floor of the vehicle to secure the floor mat To remove the floor mat turn the knob till it is aligned with the slot in the floor mat grommet and pull the floor mat up To reinstall center the slot in the floor mat grommet with the knob on the floor and set the mat in place Then turn the knob until it is perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place 2 52 Luggage Carrier Z CAUTION If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood or a mattress the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven This can cause a driver to lose control The item being carried could be violently torn off and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle Items may be carried inside Never carry s
115. the current MP3 WMA file if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous MP3 WMA file plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 WMA files on the CD lt Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigato
116. the engine This is normal lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on when recirculation is on When the engine is turned off the recirculation mode automatically turns off and must be re selected when the engine is turned on again 3 26 Instrument Panel This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defog or defrosting modes If recirculation is selected in these modes the indicator flashes three times and turns off The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed REAR Press to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on or off See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3 28 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 29 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window G3 Rear Window Defogger Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes before turning off The defogger also turns off when the engine is turned off Do not d
117. through MP3 WMA files on the CD Instrument Panel 3 95 lt Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays 3 96 Instrument Panel RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take severa
118. to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane e Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Driving Your Vehicle e Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle e When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin If the vehicle starts to slide
119. towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 5 13 5 25 Power Steering Fluid Lil The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 5 26 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Remove engine oil fill cap 3 Slide engine cover rearward and lift to remove 4 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 5 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 6 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 7 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The fluid level should be somewhere between MAX and MIN line on the dipstick in room temperature
120. transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require substitution of Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section 2 47 4 The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on continuously the programming is complete and the garage door should move when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released There is no need to continue programming Steps 6 through 8 If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with the programming Steps 6 through 8 2 48 It may be helpful to have another person assist with the remaining steps 6 After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed locate inside the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete Step 8 Features and Controls
121. until the upper radiator hose feels warm Any time during this procedure watch out for the engine cooling fan s 9 If the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck is low add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level is back up to the base of the filler neck Replace the pressure cap Be sure to secure it tightly 5 23 Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating There is an engine coolant temperature gage on the instrument panel cluster See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 38 The vehicle may also display an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE message in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 5 24 Service and Appearance Care If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage fro
122. vehicle until all the windows are clear For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors fog or frost is cleared from the surface of the mirror when Qi is pressed Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid 3 22 Instrument Panel Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system onmo p gt Fan Control AUTO Defrost Recirculation REAR Rear Climate Control Air Delivery Mode Control Driver Side Temperature Control H Display Power On Off J Rear Window Defogger K Air Conditioning L PASS Passenger M Passenger Side Temperature Control Display Function Each time the temperature mode or fan control buttons are pressed the climate control display shows that function along with the inside temperature setting The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument panel cluster D On Off Press to turn the climate control system on or off While the system is off outside air still enters through the floor outlets but the air delivery mode can be adjusted The climate control system will also turn on if either the fan control defrost AUTO or ai
123. 0 F 125 C the engine is too hot It means that the engine coolant has overheated If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions pull off the road stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 for more information Tire Pressure Light 1 If the vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system the tire pressure light provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System The light should come on briefly as the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 39 for more information When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 46 for more information Instrument Panel 3 39 Malfunction Indicator Lam
124. 2009 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual Li Seats and Restraint System esseere 1 1 Head Restraints 1 2 Front SeatS ow 1 3 Rear Seats ow 1 9 Safety Belts ow 1 14 Child Restraints oo 1 28 Airbag System 0 1 47 Restraint System GHECK cisedischegeacecnnane 1 61 Features and Controls 2 1 KEYS aero a eaat 2 2 Doors and Locks _ 2 8 Windows ccc eeeeeeeee eee 2 14 Theft Deterrent Systems ow 2 16 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 2 20 U6 sssesiesrirerrrerenn 2 31 Object Detection Systems os eee eeeee 2 34 OnStar System ou 2 42 Universal Home Remote System Storage Areas Sunroof Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview Climate Controls Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Driver Information Center DIC Audio System s Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle Towing Service and Appearance Care Service Fuel Checking Things Under the Hood All Wheel Drive _ 5 Headlamp Aiming _ 5 Bulb Replacement _ 5 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 TGS naiseen 5 Appearance Care _ 5 Vehicle Identification 5 Electrical System __ 5 Capacities and Specifications 5 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule _ Customer Assistance Information eeeeeee Custom
125. 3 SENICE aran n 5 3 Accessories and Modifications 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle 5 5 Doing Your Own Work 5 4 Engine Soon Lamp 3 39 Publications Ordering Information sisisi suss 7 15 Scheduling Appointments 7 9 Service Parts Identification Label piieis menani 5 91 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 60 Setting the Clock 3 74 Sheet Metal Damage 5 90 Shifting Out of Park cee 2 29 Shifting Into Park 0 0 2 28 Signals Turn and Lane Change 6 eeee 3 6 Spare Tire COMpPaCt ionian eunn 5 83 Installing i nrs ns 5 74 REMOVING ciiicninirnscinangns 5 71 STONING vices accinrcecseeshcnecanent 5 80 Specifications and Capacities cee 5 98 Speedometer 0 0ee 3 32 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 37 StabiliTrak System 4 5 Start Vehicle Remote 2 6 Starting the Engine 2 22 SICGVING erneieren a 4 8 Steering Wheel Controls VAU e o E TET 3 125 Steering Wheel Tilt and Telescopic 2 ececeeee eee 3 6 Storage Areas Cargo Management SySteM ariera 2 53 Center Console 2 50 Convenience Net 2 52 Cupholders vissisiiesu arisia 2 50 Glove BOX ccccceeee eee 2 50 Instrument Panel 2 50 Luggage Carrier 2 52 Rear Seat Armrest
126. 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions In order to shift out of P Park the ignition must be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be applied Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and transmission The key can be removed in LOCK OFF The shift lever must be in P Park to turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service ACC ACC ACCESSORY This is the position in which you can operate the electrical accessories or items plugged into the accessory power
127. 5 13 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Engine Coolant Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 19 f DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid GM Part No U S 88862806 Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807 Windshield Washer Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No U S 89021184 Power Steering System in Canada 89021186 Maintenance Schedule 6 13 ese Fluid Lubricant Automatic Transmission DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474 Carrier Assembly Differential Rear SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 Drive Paver anelar Un Case in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No U S 12346293 Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and in Canada 992723 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Release Paw Category LB or GC LB Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 Folding Seat in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 6 14 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be o
128. 5 92 Windshield Wiper Fuses 5 92 Power Windows and Other Power Options sseeeeeee 5 92 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 92 Instrument Panel Fuse Block cccceesseeeeeeeeues 5 92 Underhood Fuse Block 5 94 Capacities and Specifications Capacities and Specifications 5 98 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn trained and supported service people Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks ACBelcoa f N SATURN e Service and Appearance Care 5 3 Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can acce
129. 7 Disc MP Siin iniedi 3 92 3 97 Washing Your Vehicle 5 87 Courtesy Lamps 0008 3 13 i Doing Your Own Weatherstrips 5 87 Courtesy Transportation 7 9 f Service Work ssas 5 4 Windshield Backglass Cruise Control ccceeeeeeeeee 3 9 Dome Lamp Override 3 14 and Wiper Blades 5 88 Cruise Control Light 3 43 Dome ee n 3 14 Climate Control System 3 19 Cupholders ccee 2 50 Door Patean a Outlet Adjustment 3 27 Customer Assistance 7 5 z Rear Air Conditioning and OMICS E E antes 7 5 et POURING snteetesseibines a Heating System 3 28 Text Telephone TTY fg eee eoh Power Door Locks 2 8 Rear Air Conditioning and USES arara 7 5 A Programmable Automatic Heating System Customer Information Door Locks 2 9 Electronic 0065 3 29 Service Publications Rear Door Security Locks 2 9 Climate Control Systems Ordering Information 7 15 y a f Drive Systems Dual Automatic 3 22 Customer Satisfaction All Wheel Drive 5 35 Clock Setting 008 3 74 Procedure ccceeeeeeees Z A TTN i 4 INDEX Driver Seat Height Adjuster 1 3 Driver Information Center DIC c ee 3 44 DIC Operation and Displays 3 45 3 50 DIC Vehicle Customization 3 65 DIC W
130. 8 Immediately return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the Universal Home Remote button chosen in Step 3 to control the garage door for two seconds and then release it If the garage door does not move press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds and then release it Again if the door does not move press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds and then release The Universal Home Remote should now activate the garage door To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming the Universal Home Remote System Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons Gate Operator and Canadian Programming If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink com Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote
131. AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 68 Instrument Panel REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitt
132. Care Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature e Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C engine temperature e Protects against rust and corrosion e Will not damage aluminum parts e Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice If extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank but be sure the cooling syste
133. D FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 26 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then Instrument Panel 3 65 The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to enter the feature settings menu If the menu is not available FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display Before entering the m
134. DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen there is no picture or sound is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Instrument Panel 3 121 3 122 Instrument Panel Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are audio cuts out or buzzes a correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or the See your dealer retailer for headphones assistance The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle has The video screen might display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video dist
135. FF Instrument Panel 3 69 Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 70 Instrument Panel APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds
136. GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 40 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle Service and Appearance Care See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 52 for information on proper tire rotation Z CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily as it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 83
137. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter away from vehicle to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required 5 17 To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Loosen the screws that hold the cover on 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Lift off the cover 4 Remove the engine air cleaner filter element and any loose debris that may be found in the air cleaner base 5 18 5 Inspect or replace the air filter element 6 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover and reconnect the electrical connector Z CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Service and Appearance Care Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak
138. If the fluid is on or below MIN line you should add fluid close to MAX Line Service and Appearance Care What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When adding windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location Service and Appearance Care 5 27 Notice Brakes Do not top off the brake fluid Adding e fluid does not correct a leak If fluid When using concentrated Brake Fluid is added when the linings are worn washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water wi
139. NGINE OIL SOON message goes off 4 Turn the key to LOCK OFF If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil Service and Appearance Care Engine Air Cleaner Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter
140. OVer sccceseseeeeeeeees 2 53 Cargo Tie Downs 06 2 53 Cargo Management SYSUOM seieren ionni tenes 2 53 Sunroof SUNTOOL sisscicsdantaninvanaainetnats 2 54 Keys Z CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key is used for the ignition and all door locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in the vehicle See your dealer retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of the vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operatio
141. Oil to Use Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE WISOCGITY GRADE BAE SW GOLD WEATHER OU ROT LEE BAE WIW 00 SAE BOWS GA aN OTHER iino GRADE DL WOT RECOMMENDED GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol EREU By FOR Pt GASOLINE A ENGINES CERTIFI S 4 S aun Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Service and Appearance Care Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature Operation If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information 5 15 Engine Oil Additives Engine Oi
142. Release i PWR MIR Radio REAR WPR Passenger Side RT TRN SIG Turn Signal SPARE SPARE STR WHL Steering Wheel ILLUM Illumination 5 94 Relay Side Relays Usage LT PWR Driver Side Power SEAT Seat Relay RT PWR _ Passenger Side SEAT Power Seat Relay Service and Appearance Care Relays Usage PWR Power Windows WNDW _ Relay PWR Power Steering COLUMN Column Relay L GATE _ Liftgate Relay Power Lock Relay Rear Window REAR WSW Washer Relay Front Windshield FRIWSW Washer Relay Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle J Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out ae ieee Ep gel a a3 amp ki G sf er a a J m a ep zaa E 7 ary Ll ii A C Air Conditioning CLUTCH Clutch Antilock Braking ABS MIR System ABS Motor Adaptive Forward Lighting System Service and Appearance Care 5 95 All Wheel Drive AWD ECM BATT 1 Battery 1 BATT 2 Battery 2 BATT 3_ Battery 3 Engine Control Module Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 EMISSION 1 EMISSION 2 ae FAN
143. Required Services 6 6 Maintenance Footnotes 6 7 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 At Each Fuel Fill 0 5 6 9 At Least Once a Month 6 10 At Least Once a Year 6 10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants sesssecececesxczesecoeesd 6 12 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Engine Drive Belt Routing 6 15 Maintenance Record 6 16 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Maintenance Schedule 6 1 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly 6 2 Maintenance Schedule Using the Maintenance Schedule
144. S is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key Service and Appearance Care You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlin
145. See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been ina crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 Features and Controls Keys Kays 2secsentecactesie tase oitiiceresths 2 2 Remote Keyless Entry RKE SYSIGM Senicsteselacscconintetdacondy 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 2 4 Remote Vehicle Start 2 6 Doors and Locks Door LOCKS ersen rian 2 8 Power Door Locks ss00 2 8 Delayed Locking eessen 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door LOCKS isavesssacsavtecaterunead 2 9 Rear Door Security Locks 2 9 Lockout Protection 0 2 9 Liftgate 2 10 Power Liftgate 0 si 2 11 Windows WINCOWS sensies nana iaeni 2 14 Power Windows sessseee 2 14 Sun VISOFS eceececeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 16 Theft Deterrent Systems Theft Deterrent Systems Content Theft Deterrent PASS Key Ill Electronic Immo
146. Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan e Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment e Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped e Link to Emergency Services e Roadside Assistance e Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance e Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert e OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email e GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics e OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes e OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only Features and Controls OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan e All Safe and Sound Plan Services e OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving Directions Advisor delivered e RideAssist e Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service 2 43 plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit onstar com or onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn N
147. Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Service and Appearance Care Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 54 UTQGS Unifo
148. TION Exposure to high voltage can cause shock burns and even death The high voltage systems in your vehicle can only be serviced by technicians with special training High voltage devices are identified by labels Do not remove open take apart or modify these devices High voltage cable or wiring has orange covering Do not probe tamper with cut or modify high voltage cable or wiring 5 92 Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle s battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 60 Service and Appearance Care Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker anda fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current
149. Temperature Control The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off since outside air still enters the vehicle unless the recirculation mode is selected See Recirculation later in this section Driver Side Temperature Conirol Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the driver side temperature The driver side temperature display will show the temperature setting Passenger Side Temperature Conirol Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the passenger side temperature The passenger side display will show the temperature setting 3 24 Instrument Panel PASS Passenger Press to set the passenger temperature to match the driver temperature setting The PASS indicator will turn off When the passenger temperature setting is different than the driver setting the PASS indicator comes on Manual Operation The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually adjusted amp Fan Control Press to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing or while in automatic control places the fan speed under manual control The air delivery mode remains in automatic control The fan setting still displays but the word AUTO no longer displays and the AUTO button indicator light turns off 4 2 Air Delivery Mode Control Press to c
150. W 156 c2scrntseececi adele 5 12 Taillamps Turn Signal Engine Oil ccccccseeeseeeeeees 5 13 Stoplamps and Engine Oil Life System 5 15 Sidemarker Lamps 5 36 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 17 License Plate Lamp 5 37 Automatic Transmission ni Replacement Bulbs 5 37 Fiddi ester asnan Cooling System 5 19 Windshield Wiper Blade Engine Coolant 5 19 Replacement Engine Overheating 5 23 Windshield Wiper Blade a Overheated Engine Replacement eseeeeeees Protection Operating Mode 5 25 Tires Power Steering Fluid sores 2a le oc eee ene 5 39 oe Washer Fluid To Tire Sidewall Labeling 5 40 AKOS cscs ecc snes c cess enesenenenenee z Tire Terminology and E rursinowtndanieastnd 5 29 n o B46 Jump Starting RNE 5 30 e ONS sieeve cece senesenmione s Inflation Tire Pressure 5 2 Tire Pressure Monitor SYSIGM t i erines eniinn aiaiai 5 46 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation sasies 5 48 Tire Inspection and Rotation cccccccceeseeeeeeeeuaes 5 52 When It Is Time for New Tires ceccecceeeececeeeeeees 5 54 Buying New Tires eee 5 54 Different Size Tires and WHEGIS cerien edia 5 56 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 2 lt scciaccssacnsaescarecce 5 57 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ccsseseseeeeeees 5 58 Wheel Replacement 5 59 Tire Chains ccccccceeeseeeeeae 5 60 If a Tire Goes Flat
151. Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information 7 9 Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Saturn helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your retailer can offer you one of the following Shuitle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Retailers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the retailer s area 7 10 Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the retailer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your retailer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transpor
152. We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information Z CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt
153. a and for deletion instructions Customer Assistance Information Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other Saturn system containing personal information A Accessories and Modifications 655 5 3 Accessory Power 2 21 Accessory Power Outlets 3 17 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 60 Additional Required Services Scheduled Maintenance 6 6 Additives Fuel 006 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment eee 5 92 Air Cleaner Filter Engine 5 17 Air Conditioning 00 3 19 Airbag Readiness Light 3 33 Airbag System n on 1 47 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle cenevgdicmearracenemnen 1 60 How Does an Airbag Restrain cceeeeeeeeees 1 53 Passenger Sensing SYSIOM csscisenedace EESO 1 55 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle ccc cceentscdtiaecaanens 1 60 Airbag System cont What Makes an Airbag Inflate annonae 1 52 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 53 When Should a
154. a have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 57 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire ha
155. a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Itis better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for top tether anchor locations 1 46 Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag stat
156. a system fault is detected a protection circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light turns off To reset the circuit unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power RAP off and then back on See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 The power restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected The power outlet is not designed for the following electrical equipment and may not work properly if these items are plugged into the power outlet e Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as compressor driven refrigerators and electric power tools e Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc See High Voltage Devices and Wiring on page 5 91 Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system Fan Control Temperature Control Air Delivery Mode Control Air Conditioning REAR Rear Climate Control Recirculation Rear Window Defogger O17 too o gt O Off Turn the fan control all the way counterclockwise to turn the front climate control system off S8 Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Instrument Panel 3 19 Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counte
157. a that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints Child Restraint Systems A Rear Facing Infant Seat A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 34 Seats and Restraint System B Forward Facing Child Seat A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness C Booster Seats A booster seat C is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle Z CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
158. acing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts 1 36 A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Seats and Restraint System CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 for additional information W
159. ack on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect the vehicle s tires including the spare tire if the vehicle has one for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 54 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 54 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 59 U U J a J il When rotating the vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here If the vehicle has a compact spare tire do not include it in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 48 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98
160. ad switch a second time while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction Features and Controls Power Liftgate Button near Liftgate Latch The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse the operation The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures or under low battery conditions If this occurs the liftgate can still be operated manually If the vehicle is shifted out of P Park while the power function is in progress the liftgate power function will continue to completion If the vehicle is shifted out of P Park and the vehicle accelerates before the power liftgate latches closed the liftgate may reverse to the open position Cargo could fall out of the vehicle The power liftgate must be closed and latched before driving If the liftgate is power opened and the support struts have lost pressure the lights will flash and a chime will sound The liftgate will stay open temporarily then slowly close See your dealer retailer for service before using the liftgate if this occurs Obstacle Detection Features A warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position if the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle After removing the obstruction the power liftgate operation
161. affic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you e start the engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harness for towing a trailer Basic Trailer Wiring The trailer wiring harness with a seven pin connector is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle s frame The harness connector can be plugged into a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector available throug
162. all filler caps are on properly 5 11 Pull the hood down to close Lower the hood until the lifting pressure of the struts is reduced Then allow the hood to fall and latch into place under its own weight Check to make sure the hood is closed If the hood does not fully latch gently push the hood down at the front and center of the hood until it is completely latched 5 12 Service and Appearance Care Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood here is what you will see Radiator Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 19 Engine Coolant Recovery Cap See Cooling System on page 5 19 Remote Negative Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 30 Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 94 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 30 Power Steering Fluid on page 5 25 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 13 Service and Appearance Care 5 13 H Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 13 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 18 J Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 27 K Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 17 L Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 26 Engine Oil Checki
163. and Appearance Care Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp Park Lamp Rear Window Defogger Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp Stop Lamps China Only Trailer Back up Lamps Windshield Wiper Windshield Wiper High Speed 5 97 5 98 Service and Appearance Care Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Application English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information Cooling System 11 4 qt 10 8 L Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Fuel Tank Transmission Fluid Wheel Nut Torque See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 18 for information on checking fluid level All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling Engine Specifications Engine Vin Coe Spark Plug Gap 3 6L V6 Engine PDT Automate 0 043in 1 10 mm Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule INtFOGUCTION ecceesseeseeeseeeeees 6 1 Maintenance Requirements 6 1 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0 sesseeeseeeeees 6 1 Using the Maintenance Schedule ccccccesseeseeeeeeeeee 6 2 Scheduled Maintenance 6 3 Additional
164. and Tools Sealant and Compressor Kit Secondary Latch System Sidewall Labeling Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Terminology and Definitions Uniform Tire Quality Grading Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement When It Is Time for New Tires Tow Haul Mode 000665 Tow Haul Mode Light INDEX Towing Recreational Vehicle Towing a Trailer Your Vehicle sesiis Traction StabiliTrak System Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission Operation Automatic Transportation Courtesy Turn and Lane Change Signals Turn Signal Multifunction LOVES 00 cece eee ee ee eee eee eeeeeees Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA Uniform Tire Quality Grading Universal Home Remote System Operation i 11 i 12 INDEX V Vehicle Control sess ceevesse aaveesnsavees 4 3 EQAGING sieas anas 4 18 Running While Parked 2 30 SYMONS sienien iii Vehicle Customization DIC 3 65 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy seisuni ission 7 16 Vehicle Data Recording Radio Frequency RFID 7 18 Vehicle Identification Number VIN oasen 5 91 Service Parts Identification Label 5 91 Vehicle Remote Start 2 6 Ventilation Adjustment 3 27 MISOMS gecen 2 16 Voltage Devices and WIRING iitec outst rset dcamcadt tans 5 91 Voltmeter Gage eeeee 3 35 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicat
165. aner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that co
166. anic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The parking lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The parking lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or 2 is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle using the DIC all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 for instructions on how to program transmitters to this vehicle Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter Features and Controls 2 5 Separate the transmitt
167. ans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is in P Park Tune to favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM stations The balance fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted are stored with the favorite stations To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press FAV to display the page where to store the station 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite To setup the number of favorites pages 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed
168. apsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press again This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews A Eject Press to eject a DVD If the DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a DVD cannot be completed because of an unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several icons Press the pushbuttons located under any desired icon during DVD playback See the icon list below for more information The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot gt il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD e lf the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode e If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode e Ifthe DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the previ
169. arance Care 4 Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise 5 Attach the air only hose G onto the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight 6 Plug the power plug H into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 17 If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the cigarette lighter Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window 7 Start the vehicle The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor 8 Turn the selector switch A clockwise to the Air Only position 9 Press the on off B button to turn the compressor on The compressor will inflate the tire with air only 10 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage C The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 The pressure gage C may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached 11 12 13 If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by pressing the pressure d
170. arnings and Messages e 0 3 56 Driving AUNIGMK incciasinauecace iise 4 11 Before a Long Trip 4 13 Defensive nisnin 4 2 DUNK seccetecnentiessancal cqmeeetnen 4 2 Highway Hypnosis 4 13 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 14 In Rain and on Wet Roads 005 4 12 Loss of Control 4 10 Off Road Recovery 4 9 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ee 4 18 WINTER sicieieciiesnessaeaeicesteees 4 15 Driving for Better Fuel ECONOMY dcccictcsnestsentucetanes 4 1 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 25 3 22 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System cceceeeee eee 3 114 E EDR i cddseteusetivedieseivergeanctenss 7 16 Electrical Equipment Add On Equipment 5 92 Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers ceccee eee 5 92 Instrument Panel Fuse BIOGR sched cececdcacbacdeacens 5 92 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 92 Underhood Fuse Block 5 94 Windshield Wiper Fuses 5 92 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key Il 005 2 18 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key I o on 2 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 17 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp rsrsrs 3 39 Compartment Overview 5 12 COON ereraa 5 19 Coolant Heater 2 23 Coolant Temperature Gage 3 38 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 38 Coolin
171. ate empty before the vehicle is out of fuel the vehicles fuel tank should be filled soon When the fuel tank is low on fuel the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC For more information see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Here are some situations that may occur with the fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e Atthe gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e lt takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the top of the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator on the bottom line of the display See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 24 for more information The outside air temperature and compass if equi
172. aused by violation of any laws e Legal fines e Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices e Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles e Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service e Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required e Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route There is a limit of six requests per year Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any c
173. autious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include e Allow extra following distance e Pass with caution e Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape e Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 39 e Turn off cruise control Before Leaving ona Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include e Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades In good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked e Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean e Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure e Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Driving Your Vehicle 4 13 Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings w
174. avigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation system can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 44 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 125 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Features and Controls How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or if the airbags or AACN system dep
175. aying so you might want to stop it or turn it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to select between CD or Auxiliary e When a CD is in the player the CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays e f an auxiliary input device is not connected No Input Device Found displays 3 92 Instrument Panel DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to select between DVD CD or Auxiliary e Ifan auxiliary input device is not connected No Aux Input Device displays e When a disc is in either slot the DVD CD text label anda message showing the track or chapter number displays e Ifan auxiliary input device is not connected and a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button only cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device 3 e Ifa front auxiliary input device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to only navigate the CD tracks through the remote control See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information Using an MP3 Radio with CD MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays MP3 WMA files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files
176. bag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have Continued Seats and Restraint System CAUTION Continued breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a c
177. bags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first second and third rows The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 57 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts 1 53 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 52 1 54 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle Z CAUTION When an air
178. bilizer PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Retained Accessory Power RAP Starting the Engine Engine Coolant Heater Automatic Transmission Operation Tow Haul Mode Parking Brake Shifting Into Park Shifting Out of Park Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running the Vehicle While Parked Features and Controls 2 1 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror 2 31 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror c sseeees 2 31 Outside Power Mirrors 2 32 Outside Power Foldaway MiffOrSecsessecceeeenleeenc 2 33 Park Tilt Mirrors s 2se00s 2 34 Outside Convex Mirror 2 34 Outside Heated Mirrors 2 34 Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA oe 2 34 Rear Vision Camera RVC 2 37 OnStar System OnStar System 00ccee 2 42 Universal Home Remote System Universal Home Remote SyS EM seriis meninas 2 45 Universal Home Remote System Operation 2 46 2 2 Features and Controls Storage Areas Glove BOX cccceccecceceeeeeeeeeees 2 50 Cupholders seeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 50 Instrument Panel Storage 2 50 Center Console Storage 2 50 Second Row Center CONSOIE iis onaniar 2 50 Floor Mats 2 cecceceseeceeeeeees 2 51 Luggage Carrier 2 52 Rear Seat Armrest 2 52 Convenience Net ssssee 2 52 Cargo C
179. brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 34 for more information See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE POWER STEERING This message displays when a problem is detected with the power steering system When this message is displayed you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier but you will still be able to steer the vehicle Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays if there is a problem with the StabiliTrak system lf this message appears try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem See your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed a
180. btained from your dealer retailer co e a SCS owe asnes O O O O O O e O O Passenger 208in 300 sea OOO o Crea memeo es o Engine Drive Belt Routing 3 6L V6 Engine Maintenance Schedule 6 15 6 16 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 1 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Schedule 6 17 Maintenance Record cont d Odometer 7 Maintenance I or g 6 18 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or 3 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure cccececeeeeeeeenenees Online Owner Center Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY USES ccc wicca Rare aam Santen ecoisine nig eey Customer Assistance Offices 7 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program E REE Roadside Assistance Program ae AEAN Scheduling Service Appointments e Courtesy Transportation Collision Damage Repair Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government eceee
181. buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 123 for more information The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3 WMAs When a CD is inserted the text label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number displays Care of CDs and DVDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s or CD RW s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Instrument Panel 3 83 If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of the CD and DVD Player Do
182. by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say a name tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues e lf the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial lt name tag gt Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners Instrument Panel 3 113 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference tha
183. cess the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse DRIVER MIRROR The driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EASY EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 6 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings Instrument Panel 3 71 for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No automatic seat exit recall will occur ON The driver s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key
184. contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD R or CD RW that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD R or CD RW disc contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW disc are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song
185. cratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces e Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal e Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery e Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior Service and Appearance Care Fabric Carpet
186. ction needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 4 Reconnect the center safety belt mini latch to the mini buckle Do not let it twist 5 Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini latch is secure 1 13 Removing the Third Row Seats 1 Remove the cargo management system if it is in the vehicle See Cargo Management System on page 2 53 2 Remove anything on or under the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Fold the seatback down See Folding the Seatback earlier in this section 4 Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on each side of the seat 1 14 Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward and then pulling it out of the rear of the vehicle in one motion Replace the bolts in the floor holes for storage Installing the Third Row Seats 1 Before installing the seat the seatback must be folded forward See Folding the Seatback earlier in this section The seats must be placed in the proper locations to attach correctly The wider seat must be installed on the driver side and the narrower seat on the pas
187. d or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Seats and Restraint System Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should have to wear safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the 1 17 most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions If I am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 m
188. d in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Programming the Universal Home Remote System For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink com Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices 1 From inside the vehicle press and hold down the two outside buttons at the same time releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds This step will erase the factory settings or all previously programmed buttons Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons Features and Controls 2 Hold the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view The hand held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener receiver motor head unit At the same time press and hold both the Universal Home Remote button to be used to control the garage door and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the Universal Home Remote button or the hand held
189. d pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat ina position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored Seats and Restraint System In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restrain
190. d to push against the spare tire while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand 5 79 9 Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening when the spare tire has been completely lowered 10 Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging Have the hoist shaft assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced 5 80 Service and Appearance Care Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing the Spare Tire Z CAUTION The underbody mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards the secondary latch will not work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from the vehicle If this happened when the vehicle was being driven the tire might contact a person or another vehicle causing injury and damage to itself Be sure the underbody mounted spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing down Z CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place To store the spare tire 1 Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of the vehicle w
191. d unlock the glove box Cupholders There are two cupholders with removable liners located in front of the center console There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest To access pull the armrest down There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row seat and in each door There may be cupholders located at the rear of the center console To access pull the handle down Instrument Panel Storage This vehicle has an instrument panel storage area located above the radio To open the cover press the button Features and Controls Center Console Storage Pull up on the lever located on the front of the center console armrest to slide it forward and backward To open the armrest storage area press the button located on the front of the armrest There is additional storage under the armrest Move the armrest all the way to the rear position slide the cover back and remove the tray Second Row Center Console For vehicles with a second row center console open each area to access the storage compartment inside To access the upper storage area press the upper button B and lift up To access the lower storage area press the lower button C and lift up The top of the console can be folded forward for increased storage area Lift up on handle on the rear of the console A and pull forward Features and Controls Z CAUTION Never open more than one of
192. de portion of the liftgate hinges B 6 Hook the other end of the cable onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinge A 7 Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure 5 82 Service and Appearance Care 8 Make sure the metal tube is centered at the striker Push the tube toward the front of the vehicle 9 Close the liftgate and make sure it is latched properly Storing the Tools A Tool Bag B Wing Bolt C Jack Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on 1 Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you 2 Turn the jack C on its side and place down on the holding bracket 3 Reinstall the wing bolt B by turning clockwise 4 To replace the cover line up the tab at the front of the cover with the notch in the cover opening Push the cover in place and make sure that the rear clips are in the slots and push the cover closed Store the center cap or the plastic bolt on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle When you replace the compact spare with a full size tire reinstall the bolt on wheel covers or the center cap Hand tighten them over the wheel nuts using the lug wrench Compact Spare Tire Z CAUTION Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured Use on
193. dlamps can only light up so much road ahead e Watch for animals e When tired pull off the road e Do not wear sunglasses Driving Your Vehicle 4 11 e Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps e Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out e Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old 4 12 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water Driving Your Vehicle CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle Continued After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very c
194. do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads 3 9 Instrument Panel The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel On Off Press to turn cruise control on and off The indicator comes on when cruise control is on RES Resume Accelerate Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed SET Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate amp Cancel Press to cancel cruise control 3 10 Instrument Panel Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed Z CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Press the button 2 Get up to the speed desired 3 Press and release the SET button located on the steering wheel 4 Take your foot off the accelerator
195. door Driving Your Vehicle 4 21 The label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer retailer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline 4 22 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle Driving Your Vehicle Z CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep
196. e System Operation QW If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode LED indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Features and Controls Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming the Universal Home Remote Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section When programming a garage door park outside of the garage Park directly in line with and facing the garage door opener motor head or gate motor head Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed It is recommended that a new battery be installe
197. e airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Itis better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if e The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 34 1 57 Seats and Restraint System The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children including children in child restraints and for very small adults the passeng
198. e petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting 5 87 High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 87 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer 5 88 Service and Appearance Care If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat
199. e the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces Service and Appearance Care If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new Saturn original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Z CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement 5 59 Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 for more information 5 60 Service and Appearance Care Used Replacement Wheels Z CAUTION Pu
200. e Navigation Manual eccseccdsvcceetesaueds 3 103 Reception 00ee 3 126 Setting the Clock 3 74 Theft Deterrent 3 125 Reading Lamps 055 3 15 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 0 3 28 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate CONOIS cc ccacesscsontescnecnseds 3 29 Rear Door Security Locks 2 9 Rear Seat Armrest 2 52 Rear Seat Audio RSA System 0 ccc eeee eee eee eee ees 3 123 Rear Seat Entertainment SYSIOM is civescstsesedeessleres 3 114 Rear Seat Operation 1 9 Rear Vision Camera RVC 2 37 Rear Window Washer Wiper 3 9 Rearview Mirror Automatic DIMMING enserir 2 31 Rearview Mirrors 065 2 31 Reclining Seatbacks 1 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants cecceeeees 6 12 Recreational Vehicle TOWING csecvinoedsd dexheaiaecawtys 4 22 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 00 7 6 Remote Keyless Entry RKE SYSTEM cernua arenis ani 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 2 4 Remote Vehicle Start 2 6 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 5 74 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Replacement Bulbs Replacement Parts Maintenance Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to the
201. e Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied Features and Controls The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 30 for more information To shift out of P Park 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position 2 29 If you still cannot move the shift lever from P Park see your dealer retailer Parking Over Things That Burn Z CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 30 Engine Exhaust Features and Controls Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if e The vehicle idles in areas with po
202. e angle before placing the child restraint on the seat Make sure the third row bench seatbacks are both upright before placing the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 4 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if the vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 If the anchor is covered flip open the cover to expose the anchor 2 3 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 1 42 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback Seats and Restraint System If the position you are using has a fixed headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has a fixed headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the headrest or head restraint 3 Push an
203. e electric trailer brake controller should be installed by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 4 36 Driving Your Vehicle 4 NOTES Service and Appearance Care Service Cenite ssxsidendie ses eieieseteec 5 3 Accessories and Modifications cccsceeseeeeee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work cecceesseeseeeeee 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle 5 5 Fuel PUG E EEEE 5 5 Gasoline Octane cceeceees 5 5 Gasoline Specifications 5 5 California Fuel cc ceeeeee 5 6 Additives ececussceczcuncciestatiedeede 5 6 Service and Appearance Care 5 1 Fuels in Foreign Countries 5 7 All Wheel Drive Filling the Tank csssseee 5 All Wheel Drive 2s0s06 5 35 Filling a Portable Fuel oe Container eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 Headlamp Aiming F Headlamp Aiming eee 5 35 Checking Things Under the Hood Bulb Replacement Checking Things Under Bulb Replacement 5 35 the HOO si siisii 5 10 High Intensity Discharge Hood Release 2ee2eeeees 5 11 HID Lighting seese 5 36 Engine Compartment Halogen Bulbs setteeeteeeeeeesees 5 36 OVGIVIO
204. e has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones Instrument Panel 3 123 The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio is active through the headphones To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the RSA attach the iPod or portable audio device to the front auxiliary input if available located on the front audio system Turn the iPod on then choose the front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button 3 124 Instrument Panel G Power Press to turn the RSA on or off Volume Turn to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press to select between the radio AM FM XM CD and if the vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary Ki l Seek Press to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold or until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press I to go to the next track or chapter on the disc Press K1 to go
205. e is parked e Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system e Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 for more information Setting the Clock To adjust the time and date 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press to turn the radio on 2 Press to display HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year 3 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to be changed 4 To increase the time or date do one of the following e Press the pushbutton below the selected label e Press bl SEEK Press X FWD e Turn J clockwise Instrument Panel 3 75 5 To decrease the time or date Radio s do one of the following e Press K SEEK Press lt REV e Turn J counter clockwise To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from
206. e is unknown the label should then indicate previous mileage unknown Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light The driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument panel cluster A When the engine is started this light and the chime come on and stay on for several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safety belt The light also begins to flash This cycle repeats if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the light nor chime comes on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light By When the engine is started this light and the chime come on and stay on for several seconds to remind the passenger to fasten their safety belt The light also begins to flash This cycle repeats if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt Airbag Readiness Light This light shows if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor
207. e required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed h Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 19 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j Check system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables k Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary I If driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change m Change transfer case
208. e steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Press the amp button Press the button Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set soeed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Exterior Lamps E The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems e Headlamps Taillamps e Parking Lamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights Fog Lamps If Equipped Instrument Panel 3 11 The exterior lamps control has four positions D Off Turns the automatic light control on or off AUTO Automatic Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights 200 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights 3 12 Instrument Panel ZD Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed belo
209. e system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 3 106 Instrument Panel 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete lt phone name gt Yes or No followed by a tone 5 Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting lt phone name gt Linking to a Different Phone 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones If another phone is found the response will be lt Phone name gt is now connected e f another phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers e Store e Digit Store e Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The s
210. e towing vehicle 2 Shift the transmission to P Park and turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 3 Set the parking brake 4 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY 5 Shift the transmission to N Neutral 4 24 6 To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the underhood fuse block and store in a safe location See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 94 7 Release the parking brake Notice lf the vehicle is towed without performing each of the steps listed under Dinghy Towing the automatic transmission could be damaged Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing the vehicle Notice If 65 mph 105 km h is exceeded while towing the vehicle it could be damaged Never exceed 65 mph 105 km h while towing the vehicle Driving Your Vehicle Once the destination is reached 1 Set the parking brake 2 Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the underhood fuse block 3 Shift the transmission to P Park turn the ignition to LOCK OFF and remove the key from the ignition 4 Disconnect the vehicle from the towing vehicle Notice Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission Dolly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles O
211. e treble 3 80 Instrument Panel To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press Jd for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade 1 Press J until the speaker control labels display 2 Continue pressing A to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton under the desired label 3 To adjust the highlighted setting do one of the following until the desired levels are obtained e Turn J clockwise or counterclockwise Press DD FWD or lt lt REV To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position
212. e vehicle must be running while using the air compressor Turn the selector switch A counterclockwise to the Sealant Air position Press the on off B button to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire The pressure gage C will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only 10 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage C The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 The pressure gage C may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached 5 66 Notice If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes the vehicle should not be driven farther The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 11 Press the on off button B to turn the tire sea
213. eadlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service 5 35 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 37 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer 5 36 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting Service and Appearance Care Halogen Bulbs Z CAUTION Z CAUTION The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage If you try to service any of the system components you could be seriously injured Have your dealer retailer or a qualified technician service them Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Your vehicle has HID headlamps After your vehicle s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Sidemarker Lamps A Sidemarker Lamp B Taillamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate on page 2 10 or P
214. ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror e Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because hea
215. eat control See Power Seats on page 1 4 for more information e To recline the seatback tilt the top of the control rearward e To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of the control forward Z CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even when buckled up the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly Seats and Restraint System 1 9 any die y Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation 4 ei c i b oh ige r na ST a ee jl A A Seat Adjustment Handle B Reclining Seatback Strap C Sliding Seat Lever 1 10 Entering and Exiting the Third Row Z CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passeng
216. eavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal Driving Your Vehicle 4 7 If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 9 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service 4 8 Driving Your Vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD System If the vehicle has this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels when extra traction is needed This is like four wheel drive but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the axle It is fully automatic and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions When using a compact spare tire on the AWD equipped vehicle the AWD system automatically detects the presence of the compact spare and the AWD is disabled To restore the AWD operation and prevent excessive wear on the AWD system replace the compact spare with a full size tire as soon as possible See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 83 for more information Steering Power Steering If power steering assist is lost because the
217. ed Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 13 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 15 An Emission Control Service Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote g Cleaner Filter on page 5 17 See footnote I Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 52 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 10 Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air pf Maintenance Schedule 6 5 Scheduled Maintenance Ss i Ores os Maintenance II Inspect brake system See footnote a ea bane Ween Se oo erence Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section inspect suspension and slsongcomponenis See oomow my sd inspect engine cooing aston See oom gy Oo Too rea woerbeass seroma Tooo o oo epost etait system components Ses oroe 3 J T st CC Lubricate body components See footnote f oo o e Inspect throttle system See footnote j o i 6 6 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services gt 25 000 50 000 75 000
218. ed below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen 5 51 4 Start with the driver side front tire 5 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position 6 Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 7 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 5 52 Service and Appearance Care 8 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off 9 Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF 10 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label 11 Put the valve caps b
219. ed to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 5 49 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 52 and Tires on page 5 39 Notice Using non approved tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer retailer Factory installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant Using non approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 62 for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions 5 50 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning
220. eeeeeeee eee 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 7 15 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn E ET 7 15 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and PriVaCy sesierripinisai ans 7 16 Event Data Recorders 7 17 OnStar aeciaii nsi 7 18 Navigation System 7 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 7 18 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your retailer and to Saturn Together we are committed to providing our customers with unparalleled service before during and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle for total customer satisfaction We call this the Saturn Difference Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle are resolved by the retailer s sales or service departments 7 2 If for any reason your ownership experience falls below your expectations we suggest you take the following action STEP ONE Contact the Retail Customer Assistance Liaison Any member of the retail management team has the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at this level STEP TWO Should you need additional assistance in the U S contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 553 6000 In Canada call the Saturn Custo
221. eflation button D if equipped until the proper pressure reading is reached This option is only functional when using the air only hose G Press the on off button B to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage Unplug the power plug H from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Disconnect the air only hose G from the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and replace the tire valve stem cap Service and Appearance Care 14 Replace the air only hose G and the power plug H and cord back in its original location 15 Place the equipment in the original storage location in the vehicle The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses balls etc 5 69 Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister 1 Unwrap the sealant hose 2 Press the canister release button 3 Pull up and remove the canister 4 Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer retailer 5 Push the new canister into place 5 70 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the storage compartment on the driver side at the rear of the vehicle 1 Press down on the latch tab and
222. eft off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and may cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring Instrument Panel 3 41 hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 3 42 Instrument Panel Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this i
223. egative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of the vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time Service and Appearance Care Jump Starting If the vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely Z CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice lf the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the v
224. ehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake If one of the vehicles is a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in Neutral Notice lf you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle Service and Appearance Care 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on the other vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive and a remote negative jump starting terminal See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on the terminal locations 5 31 Z CAUTION Using a
225. el cluster See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 for more information Automatic Engine Grade Braking Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle The system will automatically command downshifts to reduce vehicle speed until the brake pedal is no longer being pressed While in the Electronic Range Select ERS mode grade braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a range and limiting the highest gear available Grade braking is available for normal driving and in Tow Haul mode See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 24 Features and Controls Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down then push the parking brake pedal down If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 2 27 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake
226. elt is not under the seat cushion Reclining the Seatbacks To recline the seatback 1 Leaning forward in the seat pull the reclining seatback strap B 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the strap to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Folding the Rear Seat To fold the second row seats 1 Remove anything on or under the seat 2 Place the armrest in the upright position and unfasten the safety belt 3 Pull forward on the reclining seatback strap B and push down on the seatback If the headrest touches the front seat slide the second row seat rearward To return the seatback to the seating position lift the upper corner of the seatback and push it rearward until it locks into place Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Adjusting the Seats To adjust the second row seats pull outward on the seat adjustment handle A Slide the seat forward or rearward to the desired position Release the handle and push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked 1 12 Third Row Seats Z CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or pushed forward in the entry position could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place The third
227. em warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If the light does not come on have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for all brake related DIC messages Instrument Panel 3 37 StabiliTrak Indicator Light AN ee This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normal
228. ence Center listed previously 5 If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground see Secondary Latch System on page 5 78 5 74 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 for more information 2 If the vehicle has a wheel cover loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench They will not come off Then using the flat end of the wheel wrench pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off Be careful the edges may be sharp Do not try to remove the cover with your bare hands Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced If the vehicle has aluminum wheels remove the wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench Service and Appearance Care 3 Loosen the wheel nuts but do not remove them using the lug wrench For wheels with a wheel lock key use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and lug wrench The key is supplied in the front passenger door pocket Notice If this vehicle has wheel locks and an impact wrench is used to remove the wheel nuts the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged Do not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts if this vehicle has wheel locks Le ii 6 t t To identify the appropriate jacking location find the triangle A about 12 inches 30 5 cm from the front tire
229. ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again repeat these steps This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Features and Controls Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles
230. eneuinsrss 2 24 i 2 INDEX B Battery enone 5 29 Electric Power Management 5 3 15 Run Down Protection 3 16 Belt Routing Engine 6 15 Bluetooth acssem 3 103 Brake Emergencies a e 4 5 Brake Fluid sesismseiirisssiss 5 27 Brakes yuividcanitiatielesh 5 27 ANUIOCK sete Stieatviceciewecncmeis 4 4 Parking csiderciecneeraescencsesee 2 27 System Warning Light 3 36 Braking st atipanan 4 3 Braking in Emergencies 4 5 Break In New Vehicle 2 20 Bulb Replacement 5 37 FOG LAMP idedepeccgecsis iine 3 13 Halogen Bulbs 4 5 36 Headlamp Aiming 5 35 Headlamps eeeeee ee 5 35 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 36 Bulb Replacement cont License Plate Lamps Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Sidemarker Lamps Buying New Tires Calibration California Perchlorate Materials Requirements California Fuel California Proposition 65 Warning Camera Rear Vision Canadian Owners Capacities and Specifications Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust LHOTE eienenn Winter Driving Care of Safety Belts Cargo Tie Downs Cargo Cover Cargo Management System CD MP3 3 92 Center Console Storage Chains Tire Charging System Light Check Engine Lamp Checking Things Under the Hood Chemical Paint Spotting Child Restraints Infants a
231. enu make sure the vehicle is in P Park 3 66 Instrument Panel Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Language under DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons earlier in this section for more
232. epare bulletins for servicing our products better You can get these bulletins too Customer Assistance Information Bulletins cover various subjects Some pertain to the proper use and care of your vehicle Some describe costly repairs Others describe inexpensive repairs which if done on time with the latest parts may avoid future costly repairs Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected condition Others describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle They can help a technician service your vehicle better Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number of vehicles Your Saturn retailer or a qualified technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle To order Saturn bulletins call Saturn Publications at 1 800 2 SATURN or visit saturn publications com to order online Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you
233. er HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC DELAY DOOR LOCK This feat
234. er sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Z CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 for more information including important safety information If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit ils 2 3 Turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 45 1 58 5 lf after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restrain
235. er Assistance and Information Reporting Safety DefectS oo cece cece eee 7 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 7 INGOX errienta ii Preface d El SATURN the SATURN Emblem and the name OUTLOOK are registered trademarks of Saturn Corporation GENERAL MOTORS and GM are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed Saturn reserves the right to make changes after that time without further notice This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Litho in U S A Part No 15919281 B Second Printing Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and words work together to explain vehicle operation Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 www helminc com Propri taires Canadiens On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s de concessionnaire ou l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
236. er retailer as soon as possible Instrument Panel 3 63 SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH KM H This message displays when your vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 128 km h because the vehicle detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer STARTING DISABLED SERVICE THROTTLE This message displays when your vehicle s throttle system is not functioning properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer THEFT ATTEMPTED This message displays if the content theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your vehicle See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 for more information 3 64 Instrument Panel TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The ti
237. er seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Seats and Restraint System To access the third row 1 Remove objects on the floor in front of or on the second row seat or in the seat tracks on the floor 2 Move the front center console armrest completely forward See Center Console Storage on page 2 50 3 Place folding armrests in the upright position 4 Ensure that the safety belt is unfastened and in the stowed position 5 Pull the sliding seat lever C forward and move the seatback forward The seat cushion will fold and the entire seat will slide forward Returning the Seat to the Seating Position To return the second row seat to its normal seating position 1 Remove objects on the floor behind the second row seat or in the seat tracks on the floor 2 Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked in place 1 11 Seats and Restraint System 3 Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the seatback until it is locked into place 4 Push down on the rear of the seat cushion until it is locked in place 5 Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to make sure they are locked in place 6 Check that the safety b
238. er with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery Snap the transmitter back together 2 6 Remote Vehicle Start This vehicle may have a remote starting feature that starts the engine from outside of the vehicle If the vehicle has an automatic climate control system the climate control system defaults to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures If the vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system the system turns on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off If the vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats the heated seats turn on during colder outside temperatures and shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN See Heated Seats on page 1 5 for more information The rear window defogger and heated mirrors if the vehicle has them turn on during colder outside temperatures and turn off when the key is turned to ON RUN Features and Controls Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle
239. eral safety guidelines 5 42 Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S TTT B CDE F A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall Service and Appearance Care C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of a
240. es iain 3 56 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview ccee eee ee ee 2 31 Manual Rearview Mirror 2 31 Outside Convex Mirror 2 34 Outside Heated Mirrors 2 34 Outside Power Foldaway MIOS vvccscisernrasierresaces 2 33 Outside Power Mirrors 2 32 Parik Tilt ersen aonne 2 34 MP3 1 0 cece ee eeeee cece eens 3 92 3 97 INDEX _ i 7 N Navigation System Privacy 7 18 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 3 103 Net Convenience 665 2 52 New Vehicle Break In 2 20 O Odometer scere 3 32 Off Road ROCOVESY sscsccnecerrecerern 4 9 Oil ENGQING cosinisinaesizathecmennencas 5 13 Engine Oil Life System 5 15 Pressure Light 3 42 Older Children Restraints 1 28 Online Owner Center 7 4 OnStar Privacy 0 0 7 18 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 42 Operation Universal Home Remote System 6 2 46 Outlet Adjustment 3 27 Outlets Accessory Power 3 17 i 8 INDEX Outside Convex Mirror 2 55 2 34 Heated Mirrors 2 34 Power Foldaway Mirrors 2 33 Power Mirrors 2 5 2 32 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 25 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 Owners Canadian ii P Paint Damage 0255 5 90 Parade Dimmi
241. es not start and the security light on the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key and check the fuses See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 92 lf the engine still does not start with the other key the vehicle needs service If the vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 It is possible for the PASS Key III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed to the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine does not start see your
242. esigned to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly if the vehicle has one The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle 1 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Service and Appearance Care Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attach
243. et accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed Service and Appearance Care How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system If the vehicle does not have Driver Information Center DIC buttons 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off The vehicle must be in P Park to access this display Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays 2 Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100 Three chimes sound and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message goes off 3 Turn the key to LOCK OFF If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure If the vehicle has Driver Information Center DIC buttons 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays 3 Press and hold the set reset button until 100 is displayed Three chimes sound and the CHANGE E
244. eturn to the main menu Instrument Panel 3 109 Making a Call 3 Say the entire number without 2 Say Digit Dial The system pausing responds with Digit dial using Calls can be made using the lt phone name gt please say the following commands e If the system recognizes the ae Sry Dia number it responds with first digit to dial followed by meee OK Dialing and dials a tone e Digit Dial the number 3 Say the digit to be dialed one e Call e If the system does not at a time Following each digit the Re dial recognize the number it system will repeat back the digit it confirms the numbers followed heard followed by a tone Using the Dial Command by a tone If the number is 4 Continue entering digits until the e correct say Yes The system number to be dialed is complete 1 Pressand ioe for responds with OK Dialing After the whole number has been two seconds lee system and dials the number If the entered say Dial The system Sea eady number is not correct say responds with OK Dialing and ollowed by a tone No The system will ask for dials the number 2 Say Dial The system responds the number to be re entered e If an unwanted number is with Dial using lt phone name gt a Using the Digit Dial Command recognized by the system Number please followed by g g say Clear at any time to a tone 1 Press and hold for clear the last number tw
245. ews have finished although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically press the pushbutton located under the play pause icon displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available Hl Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD 4 Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press this button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp gt Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted the radio display menu shows several icons Press the pushbuttons located under any desired icon during DVD playback See the icon list below for more information The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the
246. f rail airbags Z CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 30 Seats and Restraint System 1 49 rt There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 for more information Where Are the Airbags le The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 50 4 The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side Seats and Restraint System Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The seat mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The roof rail airbags for the driver right fr
247. f the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO is displayed Speed Compensated Volume SCV The Speed Compensated Volume SCV feature automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down so that the volume level is consistent Instrument Panel 3 77 To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM automatic volume label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation Press the pushbutton located below the BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let the display time out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds 3 78 Instrument Panel Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between AM FM or XM The selection displays J Tune Turn to select radio stations K SEEK Press to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there To scan stations press and hold K or until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and sc
248. f the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed If there are then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed If the holes are not sealed dirt water and deadly carbon monoxide CO from the exhaust can get into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly Because the vehicle has antilock brakes do not try to tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of
249. f yes continue If no return to the booster seat What is the proper way to wear Safety belts An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 23 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 1 30 Seats and Restraint System Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time Never do this Ne
250. ff An indicator light comes on when recirculation is on When the engine is turned off the recirculation mode automatically turns off and must be re selected when the engine is turned on again This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If recirculation is selected in these modes the indicator flashes three times and turns off The air conditioning also comes on when this mode is activated unless the outside air temperature is less than 40 F 4 C While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed REAR Rear Climate Control Press to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on or off See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3 28 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 29 Instrument Panel 3 21 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QW Rear Window Defogger Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes before automatically turning off The defogger will also turn off when the engine is turned off Do not drive the
251. fly after the window is fully closed 4 Repeat for each window that has the express up feature 2 16 Anti Pinch Feature The anti pinch feature is on windows with the express up feature If an object is in the way of the window as it is express closing or in certain weather conditions like severe icing the window will stop and open to a factory preset position The window functions normally once the obstruction is removed Window Lockout Ga Window Lockout The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver door armrest This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating the windows except from the driver position Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on Features and Controls Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can be moved along the rod from side to side in this position also Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror The vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver and passenger sun visors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some citie
252. folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode is chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMA Insert a CD R or CD RW disc partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing amp EJECT Press to eject the disc J Tune Turn to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing Ki SEEK I Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward
253. for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg infant will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force ona person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 31 1 32 Z CAUTION Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is alsobetter to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Seats and Restraint System Q What are the different types of A add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child
254. g System 00 5 19 Drive Belt Routing 6 15 EXWauSt cne onasin 2 30 Oll e225 2 etoweee ti torcca ree 5 13 Oil Life System 0 5 15 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 25 Overheating 0 0 5 23 Starting cceeeeeeeeeeee eee 2 22 Entry Lighting 3 14 Event Data Recorders 7 17 Extender Safety Belt 1 28 Exterior Lamps 0005 3 11 F Filter Engine Air Cleaner 5 17 Finish Damage 006 5 90 Flashers Hazard Warning 3 5 Flash to Pass rcns 3 7 Flat Tite reniant 5 61 Flat Tire Changing 5 70 Flat Tire Storing 5 80 Floor Mats ceeeeeeeeeeeee 2 51 Fluid Automatic Transmission 5 18 Power Steering 005 5 25 Windshield Washer 5 26 Fog Lamp FOG ee a 3 13 Fog Lamp Light 3 43 FUE lece oa 5 5 Additives eeeeeeeeeee 5 6 California Fuel 0 5 6 Economy Driving 4 4 1 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ceeeeee 5 10 Filling the Tank 000 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries Fuel cont GAG saz cae eito 3 44 Gasoline Octane 5 5 Gasoline Specifications 5 5 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 0 2 ee 5 92 Instrument Panel Fuse BIOCK eivecreccdivestansnsedeecs 5 92 Underhood Fuse Block
255. g hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The antilock pump or motor operating might be heard and the brake pedal might be felt to pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is nor
256. go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Seats and Restraint System 1 19 Q What is wrong with this A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way Z CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way Z CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 1 20 Seats and Restraint System Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle Z CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this A The belt is o
257. go tie downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle The tie downs can be used to secure small loads Cargo Management System This vehicle has one of these cargo management systems located in the rear of the vehicle Cargo Management System with a Removable Storage Area To open pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up Features and Controls 2 53 There is an additional storage compartment on each side of the system To open unlatch and lift the panel up To remove the cargo management system 1 Open the cover It remains open when lifted 2 Remove the side panels and place inside 3 Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the system by turning them counterclockwise 4 Close the cover 5 Pull up on the system by using the built in handles and remove it from the vehicle 2 54 Cargo Management System with a Removable Cover To remove the cargo management cover 1 Open the cover It remains open when lifted 2 Pull the cover up making sure to unhook the hinges at the rear of the cover Features and Controls Z CAUTION An improperly latched and closed cargo cover or cargo cover left in the open position could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver Someone could be injured Be sure to return the cover to the closed position and latch before driving If the cover is removed always store
258. h CD and DVD Player eseceseeseeeees 3 97 XM Radio Messages 3 102 Navigation Radio System 3 103 Bluetooth ceceseeeeeeeaes 3 103 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System e se 3 114 Rear Seat Audio RSA 3 123 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 125 Audio Steering Wheel Controle arises arrestee 3 125 Radio Reception 4 3 126 Multi Band Antenna 3 127 Instrument Panel 3 3 4 NOTES 3 4 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview oe E CP e ve Fr May a i iTA ee The main components of the instrument panel are listed here A Outlet Adjustment on page 3 27 B Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 6 C Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 31 D Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 44 E Instrument Panel Storage on page 2 50 F Audio System s on page 3 74 Navigation Radio System on page 3 103 If Equipped G Exterior Lamps on page 3 11 H Hood Release on page 5 11 Dome Lamp Override on page 3 14 Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 13 Cruise Control on page 3 9 K Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 3 6 L Horn on page 3 5 i Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 125 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 5 Center Console Shift Lever See Console Shift Lever under Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 3 9 Traction Control Sys
259. h air e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Continued e Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and ca
260. h the lug wrench into the hoist shaft 4 Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle Fae oe r 5 Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable 6 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up after removing the spare tire Do not store a full size or a flat road tire under the vehicle See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 80 To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 74 CSa T GA l Service and Appearance Care If the spare tire will not lower the secondary latch could be engaged Do the following to check the cable 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible 2 If itis not visible see Secondary Latch System on page 5 78 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot over tighten the cable 5 73 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 4 If the spare tire has not lowered tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times If the spare tire did lower to the ground continue with Step 5 under Removing the Spare Tire Vehicles with the Rear Conveni
261. h your dealer retailer The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e Black Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red Black Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuse for this circuit is installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center If the back up lamp circuit is not functional contact your dealer retailer If a remote non vehicle battery is being charged press the Tow Haul mode switch located on the center console near the climate controls This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery If the trailer is too light for Tow Haul mode turn on the headlamps Non HID only as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery Electric Trailer Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions for an electric trailer brake controller are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column for the electric trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Red Black Power Supply e White Brake Switch Signal e Gray Illumination Driving Your Vehicle 4 35 e Dark Blue Trailer Brake Signal e Black Ground Th
262. handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Driving Your Vehicle 4 31 Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns 4 32 Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could ca
263. hange the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press or until the desired mode appears on the display Pressing a mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode without turning the system on Press a mode button while in automatic control to place the system into manual control The air delivery mode setting still displays but the word AUTO no longer displays and the AUTO button indicator light turns off 7 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets i74 Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets td Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window and second row floor outlets In this mode the system uses outside air 5 Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When this mode is selected the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is less than 40 F 4 C Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear W Defrost Press to turn the defrost on or off This mode quickly clears the windshield of fog or frost Air is directed to the windshield side window and flo
264. he Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 5 43 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire 5 44 Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing
265. he seat See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 for important safety information 1 59 The on indicator may be lit if an object such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat If this is not desired remove the object from the seat Z CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 60 Seats and Restraint System Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Z CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors Continued CAUTION Continued They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there an
266. he transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 3 With Remote Start and Liftgate Without Remote Start or Liftgate Similar Features and Controls Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature see Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 6 for additional information Lock Press to lock all the doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn sounds when is pressed again within five seconds See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for additional information Pressing may arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 n Unlock Press once to unlock only the driver door If A is pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 lt Power Liftgate Press and hold for about one second to open and close the liftgate The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing 2 Vehicle Locator P
267. he washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed This is normal HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating the fluid WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when the washer fluid is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper and rear wash button is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system Rear Wiper Press to turn the rear wiper on and off The wiper speed cannot be changed Gi Wash Press to spray washer fluid on the rear window The window wiper will also come on Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on the window The rear wiper will run a few more cycles after it is released If the rear wiper function was already on prior to pressing the wash button it stays on until the wiper button is pressed again The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in the windshield washer reservoir See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 26 Cruise Control With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged Z CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So
268. heat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 Ifin a traffic jam shift to N Neutral otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving D Drive or L Low If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode next in this section Service and Appearance Care Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation If an overheated engine condition exists an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode there is a significant loss in power and engine performance The temperature gage indicates an overheat condition exists Driving extended distances and or
269. hen securing a child restraint ina rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around ina collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor Seats and Restraint System In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint
270. here are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when 4 DVD or DVD CD AUX is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug a headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack Connect an auxiliary input device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information on driver distraction To use an auxiliary input device connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack Instrument Panel 3 91 D Power Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues pl
271. hes that control the passenger and rear windows The power windows work with the ignition in ACC ACCESSORY ON RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 Features and Controls Press the switch to lower the window Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window Express Down Windows The express down feature allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press the window switch fully and release it to activate the express down feature The express mode can be canceled by pressing or pulling the switch Express Up Window The express up feature allows the windows to be raised all the way without holding the switch up Pull the switch up fully and release it to activate the express up feature The express up mode can be canceled by pressing or pulling the switch 2 15 Programming the Power Windows If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged disconnected or replaced windows with the express up feature need to be reprogrammed for this feature to work To program the window 1 Close all doors with the ignition in the ACC ACCESSORY ON RUN position or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 2 Press and continue to hold the window switch until the window is fully open 3 Pull up and hold the window switch to close the window Continue to hold it brie
272. hicle has DIC buttons See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for additional information If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons see your dealer retailer to enable or disable the remote start system 2 8 Features and Controls Doors and Locks Door Locks CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Continued e Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it e Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening To lock or unlock a door use the key from the outside or the door lock from the inside Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the front doors mw Unlock Press to unlock the doors o Lock Remove the key from the ignition and press to l
273. hicle in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value To reset the value to zero press and hold the set reset button Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons the information below explains the operation of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off or acknowledge DIC messages The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer trip odometers oil life park assist menu for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming units and display language If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer and trip odometers Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items ODOMETER Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km
274. hile driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include e Keep the vehicle well ventilated e Keep interior temperature cool e Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides e Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often 4 14 Driving Your Vehicle Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape e Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Z CAUTION Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well Continued e Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut
275. his message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 15 for information on how to reset the message See Engine Oil on page 5 13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE On vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 39 Loading the Vehicle Instrument Panel 3 57 on page 4 18 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons earlier in this section If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 39 CRUISE SET TO XXX This message displays whenever the cruise control is set See Cruise Control
276. hoice that is highlighted in any menu C Display Menu Press to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or Zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active Hl Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD Press twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press to start playing a DVD Press while a DVD is playing to pause it Press again to continue playing the DVD Instrument Panel 3 119 When the DVD is playing depending on the radio play may be slowed down by pressing gt Il then PP The DVD continues playing ina slow play mode Depending on the radio perform reverse slow play by pressing P Il then 4 To cancel slow play mode press P again ka Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 120 Instrument Panel lt Fast Reverse Press to quickly reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press gt
277. iameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards 5 57 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate 5 58 Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor lab
278. icators Warning Lights Gages and Indicators sseseeeees 3 30 Instrument Panel Cluster 3 31 Speedometer and Odometer esisesisseesc c22ieecies 3 32 Tachometer eccsceceeeeeeenes 3 32 Safety Belt Reminders 3 32 Airbag Readiness Light 3 33 Passenger Airbag Status Tate etc i0 ee 3 34 Charging System Light 3 35 Voltmeter Gage seese 35 Brake System Warning iH E 3 36 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 37 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 37 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 606 3 38 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Tire Pressure Light Malfunction Indicator Lamp Oil Pressure Light Security Light Fog Lamp Light eseese 3 2 Instrument Panel Cruise Control Light 3 43 Highbeam On Light 3 43 Tow Haul Mode Light 3 43 Fuel Gage eresse sessa 3 44 Driver Information Center DIC Driver Information Center DIC nesmeta 3 44 DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons 3 45 DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons 3 50 DIC COMpass carnais iian 3 54 DIC Warnings and MESSAGES seeiis reirinta 3 56 DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons 3 65 Audio System s Audio System s eee 3 74 Setting the Clock eeen 3 74 Radio S srecni r sniene 3 75 Using an MP3 Radio with CD seriesas 3 92 Using an MP3 Radio wit
279. ice 5 34 Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Service and Appearance Care Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle All Wheel Drive It is recommended that the all wheel drive lubricants be checked and filled by the dealer retailer When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 Service and Appearance Care Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the h
280. ies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 3 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Driving Your Vehicle 4 9 Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving ans a If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement 4 10 Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle ona two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing e Look down the road
281. if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays 4 cp Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW disc can be removed If the CD R or CD RW disc is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW disc automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 3 100 Instrument Panel 4 DVD Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW disc can be removed If the CD R or CD RW disc is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW disc automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject A Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing Ki SEEK D Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of
282. ight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 4 28 Driving Your Vehicle Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh based upon the vehicle model and options 7 700 lbs 3 493 kg All Wheel Drive V92 Trailer Towing Package 4 500 Ibs 2 041 kg 9 700 Ibs 4 400 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 for more information Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carr
283. iler Driving while this light is on could drain the battery When this light comes on the Driver Information Center DIC also displays the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information If a short distance must be driven with the light on be sure to turn off all accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When the engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage shows the battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running this gage shows the condition of the charging system The vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of charge of the battery The voltmeter may fluctuate Instrument Panel 3 35 This is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period If there is a problem with the battery charging system a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC and or the charging system light will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Charging System Light on page 3 35 for more information However readings in either warning zone may indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the
284. iles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 18 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 30 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Seats and Restraint System First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should
285. incial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer The vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode later in this section e The vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger and load carrying vehicle If a trailer is towed the vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load Three important considerations have to do with weight e The weight of the trailer e The weight of the trailer tongue And the weight on the vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important Driving Your Vehicle 4 27 It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See We
286. incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition CX V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or to cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information Pairing Information e Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system e The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving e The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired e Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time e Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Pair The
287. indshield The wipers clear the windshield and either stop or return to the preset speed The ignition key must be in ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN for this to work See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 26 Windshield Washer Fluid Z CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC when the washer fluid is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Heated Windshield Washer For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid system it helps to clear ice snow tree sap or bugs from the windshield This feature only works with the front wiper system x The button is located to the left of the steering column below the instrument panel brightness control knob yp T Press the heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system This activation begins four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it can take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles The system turns off automatically after four wipe cycles or the button can be pressed again to turn it off Under certain outside temperature conditions steam might flow out of t
288. ine service and maintenance records e Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide e Exclusive privileges and offers e Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links Saturn www saturn com Saturn Merchandise www saturncollection com Help Center www saturn com helpcenter e FAQ e Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist owners who have hearing difficulties Saturn has installed special TDD Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance Center
289. iness Bureau BBB Auto Line The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty This program is available at no cost to you our customer Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case is generally heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you can reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the toll free telephone number or by writing them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors Saturn Corporation reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance Information STEP THREE Canadian Owners General Motors Participation in the Mediation Arbitration Program In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure
290. ing In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in acrash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Driving Your Vehicle 4 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake peda
291. ing data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR 7 17 Saturn will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of Saturn s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that Saturn collects or receives may also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner 7 18 OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 42 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored dat
292. ings It comes on when REAR is pressed Independent Mode This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls It comes on when any rear control is adjusted Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob to O to turn the fan off Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature Air Delivery Mode Control Turn to the desired mode to change the airflow direction 7a Vent Air is directed through the overhead outlets 4 4 Bi Level Air is directed through the rear floor outlets as well as the overhead outlets td Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets The rear system floor outlets are located under the third row seats Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 4 i PEL ee tt t mE kj ch ta n Lad i Ena E S Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls A Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front B Air Delivery Mode Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off C Temperature Control The system also turns on if any of the rear controls except for the are pressed An indicator comes on when the rear system is on For vehicles with the rear climate control system the controls are located on the rear of the center console The
293. int If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Seats and Restraint System Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations a a Second Row Bucket 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Row 60 40 Bench 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Third Row 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors To assist you in locating the lower anchors each second row anchor position has a label near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion Seats and Restraint System 1 39 To assist you in locating the top tether anchors the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover or near the anchor A f Second Row Bucket Shown Bench Similar The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the second row Open the cover to access the anchors Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 4e Third Row Seat The third row has one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of
294. int to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could Continued Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position Seats and Restraint System 1 41 1 2 Recline the seatback to the full reclined position Make sure the second row bench seatbacks are aligned at the sam
295. ir inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo Service and Appearance Care DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes t
296. ire as soon as possible Notice Tire chains will not fit the compact spare Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on the compact spare 5 84 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior Service and Appearance Care When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could s
297. is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Instrument Panel 3 103 Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System manual Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls
298. is low on fuel The vehicle could run out of fuel If the vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 3 for additional information Q Remote Start This button is located on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle has remote start To start the vehicle 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release then immediately press and hold Q until the parking lamps flash If the vehicle s lights can not be seen press and hold Q for at least four seconds The vehicle s doors lock When the vehicle starts the parking lamps turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running Pressing Q again after the vehicle has started shuts the vehicle off 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the time by 10 minutes for the engine to continue to run Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to the ON RUN position to drive the vehicle If the vehicle is left running it automatically shuts off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start Aim the RKE
299. is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 72 Instrument Panel MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 6 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The driver s seat and outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting wil
300. ists see your dealer retailer Features and Controls Rear Vision Camera Location The camera is located above the license plate The area displayed by the camera is limited and does not display objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper The area displayed can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides aa FLA a na F E Ea D i 1 Any i i 4 P E B B A View displayed by the camera B Corner of the rear bumper When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if e The RVC is turned off See Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off earlier in this section e Itis dark e The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens e Ice snow mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens Clean the lens rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth e The back of the vehicle is in an accident the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer retailer e There are extreme temperature changes Features and Controls 2 41 The rear vision camera sy
301. it outside of the vehicle When it is replaced always be sure that it is securely reattached 3 Remove the cover from the vehicle and store outside of the vehicle Sunroof The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats and a rear sunroof over the second row seats The rear sunroof does not open The switches to operate the front sunroof and rear sunshade are located on the headliner above the rearview mirror The ignition must be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof See Ignition Positions on page 2 20 1 1 7 J Vent From the closed position press and hold the front of the driver side switch to vent the sunroof Press and hold the rear of the driver side switch to close the sunroof Express open Express close From the closed position press and release the rear of the driver side switch to express open the sunroof Features and Controls Press and release the front of the driver side switch to express close the sunroof The front sunshade must be opened and closed manually Push up on the sunshade handle to open the sunshade Notice The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade To open the rear sunshade located over the second row seats press and release the rear of the passenger side switch Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade 2 55 2 56 Feature
302. ith the valve stem down 2 Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield on the compact spare tire 3 Slide the cable retainer through the center of the wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel When the compact spare tire is almost in the stored position turn the tire so the valve is toward the rear of the vehicle This position helps when checking the air pressure in the compact spare tire Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the lug wrench until you feel more than two clicks This indicates that the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened 6 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the lug wrench to tighten the cable Service and Appearance Care Storing the Flat Tire 1 Remove the cable package from the jack storage area 2 Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft if the vehicle has aluminum wheels 3 Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle 4 Pull the cable A through the door striker E the center of the wheel D and the plastic spare tire heat shield C as shown 5 81 5 Hook the cable onto the outsi
303. iver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads 3 16 Instrument Panel A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on
304. iving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle e Press amp and begin speaking to answer the call Press CX V to ignore a call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work e Press amp lt to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold e Press amp amp again to return to the original call e To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action Press C V to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press amp 4 The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press amp to link all the callers together Ending a Call Press V to end a call Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed by
305. jects must be at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below liftgate level Objects must also be within 8 feet 2 5 m from the rear bumper This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather A single beep sounds the first time an object is detected Beeping may occur beginning at 23 inches 0 6 m Beeping occurs for a short time when the vehicle is closer than 23 inches 0 6 m and again at 1 foot 0 3 m from the object 2 36 Features and Controls The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object peseription English Metric amber light amberiamberlighs amber amberired lights amber amber red lights flashing The system can be disabled through the Driver Information Center DIC See Park Assist under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 for more information When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system does not activate due to a temporary condition the message PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse This may occur under the following conditions e The driver disables the system e The ultrasonic sensors are not clean Keep the vehicle s rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning ins
306. k Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service Z CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 for more information including important safety information Charging System Light The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on but the engine is not running as a check to show the light is working It should go out when the engine is started If the light stays on or comes on while driving there may be a problem with the electrical charging system Have it checked by your dealer reta
307. k with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 Features and Controls Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Adjust the inside rearview mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side Use the day night adjustment to help prevent glare from the headlamps behind you Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and to the left for daytime use Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information about OnStar and how to subscribe to it See OnStar System on page 2 42 for more information on the services OnStar provides 2 31 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons for the OnStar system See your dealer retailer for more
308. kes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 37 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while brakin
309. l Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed 5 16 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever res
310. l can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a Toshiba code set Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries 1 Slide the rear cover back on the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Recommended Action No power The ignition might not be turned ON RUN or in ACC ACCESSORY The picture does not fill the screen Check the display mode settings There are black borders on the top in the setup menu by pressing the and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote looks stretched out control In auxiliary mode the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls connections at both devices The remote control does not work Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly After stopping the player push If the stop button was pressed Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time the DVD player resumes where left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD was stopped the beginning If the stop button was pressed two times the
311. l coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant The coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 23 5 20 What to Use Z CAUTION Adding only plain water to the Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant cooling system can be dangerous Service and Appearance
312. l is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important 4 4 Driving Your Vehicle And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the bra
313. l minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files by that artist To listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The player goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the aloum button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pu
314. l remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 6 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be
315. l the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly Z CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Service and Appearance Care Brake Adjustment Every time the brakes are applied with or without the vehicle moving the brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and
316. l vehicle towing e What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow e Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 13 Dinghy Towing If the vehicle is front wheel drive it can be dinghy towed from the front These vehicles may also be towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly See Dolly Towing later in this section If the vehicle is all wheel drive it can be dinghy towed from the front These vehicles can also be towed by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly Driving Your Vehicle 4 23 For vehicles being dinghy towed the vehicle should be run at the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about five minutes This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components Re install the fuse to start the vehicle To tow the vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground 1 Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to th
317. lant and compressor kit off The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire therefore Steps 12 through 18 must be done immediately after Step 11 Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage 12 13 14 15 16 Service and Appearance Care Unplug the power plug H from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Turn the sealant air hose F counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem Replace the tire valve stem cap Replace the sealant air hose F and the power plug H back in their original location If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister E and place it ina highly visible location The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced 17 Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle 18 Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km to distribute the sealant in the tire 19 Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi 68 kPa below the recommended inflation pressure stop driving the
318. ld be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 44 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information HEATED WASH Washer FLUID SYSTEM OFF This message displays when you manually turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or when the system automatically turns off See Heated Windshield Washer under Windshield Washer on page 3 8 for more information This message clears itself after 10 seconds Instrument Panel 3 59 HEATING WASH Washer FLUID WASH Washer WIPES PENDING This message displays when you turn on the heated windshield washer fluid system See Heated Windshield Washer under Windshield Washer on page 3 8 for more information HOOD OPEN On some models this message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordingly 3 60 Instrument Panel LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn
319. le if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc If the retro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of miles mi or kilometers km that were driven during the last ignition cycle RANGE Press the trip fuel button until RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the Instrument Panel 3 49 fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset AVG Average ECONOMY Press the trip fuel button until AVG
320. ll the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for the safety of the driver and the passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission rear axle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or prov
321. load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location if a fuse goes out Replace the fuse as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block cseaes CSEE ES eac eaeaesa 3 369 ea Ca Ea 3 363 ise se 9 ao 2s Fuse Side Service and Appearance Care 5 93 AIRBAG Amplifier BCK UP Back up STOP Lamp Stoplamp Body Control ee Canister Vent CTSY DRILCK Daytime Running GMC HID DRL 2 Only Rear Fog Lamps China Only DSPLY __ Display Front Windshield HTD COOL Heated Cooling SEAT Seats Heating Ventilation HVAC and Air Conditioning ADV PWR Inadvertent LED Power LED NFOTMNT Infotainment Driver Side Turn Memory Seat Module MSM PDM Power Mirrors WR Liftgate
322. lowly or not shift gears when you go faster and you continue to drive the vehicle that way you could damage the transmission Have the vehicle serviced right away You can drive in L Low when you are driving less than 35 mph 56 km h and D Drive for higher speeds until then L Low This position gives you access to gear ranges This provides more engine braking but lower fuel economy than D Drive You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud 2 26 Electronic Range Select ERS Mode ERS mode allows you to choose the top gear limit of the transmission and the vehicle s speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer The vehicle has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster When using the ERS Mode a number will display next to the L indicating the current gear that has been selected To use this feature 1 Move the shift lever to L Low 2 Press the plus minus button located on the shift lever to increase or decrease the gear range available When you shift from D Drive to L Low the transmission will shift to a pre determined lower gear range The highest gear available for this pre determined range is displayed next to the L in the DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 44 and DIC Operation and Features and Controls Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 fo
323. loy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of acrash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion
324. ly one compact spare tire at a time The compact spare tire if the vehicle has one was fully inflated when the vehicle was new however it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on the vehicle stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare Service and Appearance Care is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience Of course it is best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as possible The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire wheel and other parts of the vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles 5 83 And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together The All Wheel Drive AWD system will be automatically disabled when you use the compact spare To restore the AWD and prevent excessive wear on the clutch in your AWD replace the compact spare tire with a full size t
325. ly the indicator light goes off If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the StabiliTrak system and the vehicle might need service When this warning light is on the system is off and will not limit wheel spin 3 38 Instrument Panel This light flashes when the StabiliTrak system is active If the StabiliTrak system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on the vehicle needs service See StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E AaS The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 for more information Notice Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat See Engine Overheating on page 5 23 The vehicle s engine could be damaged and it might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on This light also comes on briefly when starting the vehicle If it does not see your dealer retailer Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature Under normal driving conditions the gage will read 210 F 100 C or less If the gage pointer is near 26
326. m Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on the radio To enable Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as radio video screen RSA DVD and or CD While Parental Control is on displays When the radio is turned back on Parental Control is unlocked Headphones WR i The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3 WMAs DVD As radio any auxiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature a ib WZ The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 2 switch and a volume control Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light does not come on the batteries might need to be replaced Intermittent sound or static on the headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information The headphones automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side
327. m TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Service and Appearance Care Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists 5 47 When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the
328. m running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice If the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 25 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment Z CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 25 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle e Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving e Idles for long periods in traffic e Tows a trailer If the over
329. m is cool before this is done See Engine Coolant on page 5 19 for more information Service and Appearance Care The coolant recovery tank cap has this symbol on it When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD line marked on the recovery tank When the engine is hot the level could be higher than the FULL COLD line If the coolant is below the FULL COLD line when the engine is hot there could be a leak in the cooling system If the coolant is low add the coolant or take the vehicle to a dealer retailer for service 5 21 How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank Z CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank 5 22 Service and Appearance Care How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2 Remove the radiator pressure CAUTION Continued cap when the cooling system Z CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood elect
330. mal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving Driving Your Vehicle 4 5 situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles 3 2 km of driving before the system initializes 4 6 Driving Your Vehicle If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL SERVICE STABILITRAK If these conditions are observed turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC the vehicle should be taken in for service For more information
331. match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the batteries have enough water You do not need to add water to the ACDelco battery or batteries installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 32 Service and Appearance Care Z CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go toa heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not
332. mends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty 7 14 Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the Natio
333. mer Communication Centre at 1 800 263 1999 A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will handle your call and assist in providing product and warranty information the nearest retailer location roadside assistance brochures literature and discuss any concerns you may have Customer Assistance Information We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This 17 digit number can be found on the vehicle registration or title on the upper driver side corner of the instrument panel or on your roadside assistance key card The name of your selling and servicing retail facility e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage e Your daytime and evening phone numbers When contacting Saturn please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a retailers facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both Saturn and its retailers are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two Saturn and its retailers offer the additional assistance of a neutral party through our voluntary participation in a mediation arbitration program called Better Bus
334. mmands to delete name tags e Delete e Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold amp amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no e lf the name tag is correct say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting lt name tag gt returning to the main menu e Ifthe name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags e Say No to cancel the function and r
335. mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio s on page 3 75 for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu by using the remote control To change a setting 1 Press L 2 Use A V lt gt and to navigate and use the setup menu 3 Press L again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if the vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if the vehicle has this feature The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 123 for more information When a device is connected to the A V jacks or the radio s auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this
336. n iv Preface Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index Airbag Readiness Light X Air Conditioning Antilock Brake System ABS Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Brake System Warning Light Charging System 1 Cruise Control E Engine Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps 40 Fog Lamps D Fuel Gage 41 Fuses Headlamp High Low Beam Changer LATCH System Child Restraints es Malfunction Indicator Lamp 7 Oil Pressure 4 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Power Remote Vehicle Start fe D Safety Belt Reminders E Tire Pressure Monitor E Tow Haul Mode Traction Control amp Windshield Washer Fluid Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints Head Restraints 5 1 2 Front Seats Manual Seats scecseeeeeeeee 1 3 Seat Height Adjuster 1 3 Power Seats cecceceeceeeeeeeees 1 4 Manual Lumbar c 0seesees 1 4 Power Lumbar ceceeeeeeeees 1 5 Heated Seats ceccecceeeseeees 1 5 Memory Seat and Mirrors 1 6 Reclining Seatbacks 5 1 8 Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation 1 9 Third Row Seats sesseeeee 1 12 Seats and Restraint System Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone How to Wear Safety Bel
337. n Airbag Inflate 2 0 0 cece eee 1 51 Where Are the Airbags 1 49 Airbags Passenger Status Indicato criin 3 34 All Wheel Drive 5 5 35 All Wheel Drive AWD SYSIEM JActesiteiicncivcealns 4 8 Antilock Brake System ABS 4 4 Warning Light 3 37 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 89 Care of Safety Belts 5 86 Chemical Paint Spotting 5 90 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 87 Fabric Carpet 0e 5 85 Finish Care eeeeeeeeees 5 87 Finish Damage 5 90 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces 5 86 INDEX i 1 Appearance Care cont Interior Cleaning 5 84 Leather weicieiestedieeessreetacen 5 86 Sheet Metal Damage 5 90 TIES rnaner unirea 5 90 Underbody Maintenance 5 90 Washing Your Vehicle 5 87 Weatherstrips 4 5 87 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 88 Assistance Program Roadside ceceeereeees 7 6 Audio System a an 3 74 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 20 0 cesses 3 125 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual n a eenen 3 103 Setting the Clock 3 74 Audio System Ss e1ee 3 75 Audio Systems Radio Reception 3 126 Rear Seat RSA 3 123 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 125 Automatic Transmission FIUIG E R AT 5 18 Operation aeisiircsii
338. n explains how to use the jack and change a tire Service and Appearance Care Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side at the rear of the vehicle 1 Open the jack storage compartment by pulling on the latch tab located toward the rear of the vehicle and pulling the cover off A Tool Bag B Wing Bolt C Jack 5 71 2 Remove the wing bolt B by turning it counterclockwise 3 Push the jack C up out of the holding bracket 4 Turn the jack on its side with the bottom facing toward you 5 Pull the jack straight out bottom first The tools you will be using include the jack A and lug wrench B 5 72 Removing the Spare Tire The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle in front of the rear bumper See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 83 for more information about the compact spare A pL poe la M oe ne p ii iy nnne p e 5 E A Rear Convenience Center B Lug Wrench C Storage Compartment Cap Hole onmo Service and Appearance Care Hoist Shaft Compact Spare Tire Retainer Hoist Shaft Assembly Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment Attac
339. n is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Features and Controls 2 3 Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this e Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section e If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 195 feet 60 m away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of t
340. nal Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation If NHTSA receives similar complaints it could open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it could order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your retailer or Saturn Corporation To contact NHTSA call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from Safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify Saturn Call 1 800 553 6000 or write Saturn Corporation 100 Saturn Parkway Mail Drop 371 999 S24 Spring Hill TN 37174 1500 In Canada call 1 800 263 1999 or write Saturn Customer Communication Centre General Moto
341. name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMA In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD R or CD RW disc partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a softkey menu appears and allows navigation of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through available folders a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW disc in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned back Instrument Panel 3 99 on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped
342. nced see your dealer retailer for additional information on the power accessory outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would Instrument Panel 3 17 not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 3 18 Instrument Panel Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current For vehicles with this power outlet it can be used to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of 150 watts The power outlet is located on the rear of the center console An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in use The light comes on when the ignition is in ON RUN and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet and no system fault is detected The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is in LOCK OFF or if no equipment is plugged into the outlet If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or
343. nd Young Children Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Older Children Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Systems Where to Put the Restraint 2 53 3 97 2 50 INDEX i 3 Circuit Breakers 00 5 92 Collision Damage Repair 7 11 D Cleaning Compact Spare Tire 5 83 o z Aluminum or Chrome Plated COMPASS 00 eeeeeeee eee ineas 3 54 ee OISIOM bers i Wheels eee 5 89 Compressor Kit Tire Aa E tetacran 7 17 Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 87 Sealant a an 5 62 Davie Runnin Fabric Carpet 0eeeee 5 85 Content Theft Deterrent 2 16 y 9 S Lamps Automatic Finish Care sinisisi 5 87 Control of a Vehicle 4 3 i Headlamp System 3 12 Instrument Panel Vinyl Convenience Net 2 52 jat A Defensive Driving 4 2 and Other Plastic Coolant oe Delayed Entry Lighting 3 14 Surfaces 5 86 Eng cennsa 5 19 Delayed Exit Lighting 3 15 IMETO maeianeines ninnan 5 84 Engine Temperature Gage 3 38 Ka a SS UUU F Delayed Headlamps 3 12 Leather essiant chinese sae 5 86 Engine Temperature f F Delayed Locking 005 2 8 TGS caeiie meane ni 5 90 Warning Light 3 38 DIC Compass e eeeeeees 3 54 Underbody Maintenance 5 90 Cooling System ee 5 19
344. nd drive accordingly SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2 18 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 39 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 48 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message is displayed the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer retailer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 for more information SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non emissions related malfunction occurs Have the vehicle serviced by your deal
345. nd static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Ph
346. nd steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year 6 8 d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 38 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 5 88 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 61 Maintenance Schedule f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assemblies secondary latches pivots spring anchor and release pawl hood and door hinges rear folding seats and liftgate hinges More frequent lubrication may b
347. ng 3 15 Park Shifting Into senienas 2 28 Shifting Out of 2 29 Park Aid c cceeeeeeeeeee ees 2 34 Park Tilt Mirrors 254 2 34 Parking ASSIST onenarena naris 2 34 Over Things That Burn 2 29 Parking Brake 0ee 2 27 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator siarce inne 3 34 Passenger Sensing System 1 55 Passing aviivcunivehcieetne 4 10 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 0008 2 18 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation 2 18 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 5 4 Phone Bluetooth u 3 103 Power Door LOCKS iarere 2 8 Electrical System 5 92 Liftgate iis iaeoa aiude 2 11 Lumbar Controls 4 1 5 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current 0cceceeeee ees 3 18 Retained Accessory RAP 2 21 ET E EE EE TEE 1 4 Steering Fluid sesira 5 25 WINdOWS 2 6 e eeeeeee 2 14 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts c ee 1 28 PIIVACY shoppat neinn a 7 16 Navigation System 7 18 OnStar ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 7 18 Programmable Automatic Door LOCKS riesis nn 2 9 Proposition 65 Warning California sessirnir 5 3 R Radio Frequency Identification RFID Privacy 00 7 18 Radio S sisssscebasiceasedacswess seedne 3 75 Radios Navigation Radio System se
348. ng Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 5 14 When to Add Engine Oil mu If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged Service and Appearance Care TA AAAA See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross hatched area Push the dipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine
349. ng and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system do one of the following e Press Hl on the remote control e Press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause icons displayed on the radio e lf the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback do one of the following Press P il on the remote control e Press the pushbutton located under the play pause icon displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc Ejecting a Disc Press amp DVD on the radio to eject the disc If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically If the movie is reloaded and the RSA system is sourced to the DVD the player begins to play again If loading and reading a DVD or CD cannot be completed and the disc fails to eject press and hold amp DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when t
350. nge the batteries on the headphones 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Audio Video A V Jacks j tea a te Ba T The A V jacks located on the rear of the floor console allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables not supplied might be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player
351. nly when work is done on the brake hydraulic system When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light comes on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 5 28 What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir Z CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Service and Appearance Care Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 87 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard al
352. not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD or DVD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen 3 84 Instrument Panel The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice lf a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD ata time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp EJECT or CD Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing A CD ejecting from a radio with CD and DVD ejects from the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The disc can be removed If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc automatically pulls back into the player 4 DVD Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed and the disc fails to
353. nspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection e The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on e The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Light Z CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil aay The oil pressure light should come on briefl
354. nt wheels It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily Features and Controls Z CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply the regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from P Park when the ignition key is in ON RUN If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever then push the shift lever all the way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 2 29 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The
355. ntains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Service and Appearance Care 5 7 Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving 5 8 Service and Appearance Care Filling the Tank Z CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instruction
356. ntinued Z CAUTION e Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index e If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 The vehicle may have a power liftgate The vehicle must be in P Park to use this feature The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the power liftgate is used You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing Notice If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways e Press and hold the power liftgate button on the RKE transmitter until the liftgate starts moving Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 for more information 2 12 gt i xy OFF Power Liftgate Button on Center Console e Press the liftgate button on the center console e Press the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle Pressing the buttons or touchp
357. o seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them 3 110 Instrument Panel Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using lt phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag of the person to call e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number e If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using lt phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Rece
358. ock the doors Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition This feature can be programmed by using the Driver Information Center DIC See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle s power door locks This feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for more information Rear Door Security Locks The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside Open the rear doors to access the security locks on the inside edge of each door Features and Controls 2 9 To set the locks insert a key into the slot and turn it to the horizontal position The door can only be opened from the outside with the door unlocked To return the door to normal operation turn the slot to the vertical
359. of the vehicle s turn signal and hazard flashers 2 34 Park Tilt Mirrors If the vehicle has the memory package the outside mirrors have a park tilt feature This feature tilts the outside mirrors to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R Reverse This allows the driver to view the curb for parallel parking The passenger and or driver mirror returns to its original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R Reverse or the ignition is turned off or to OFF LOCK This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 6 for more information Features and Controls Outside Convex Mirror Z CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat Outside Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors G3 Rear Window Defogger Press to heat the mirrors See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 for more information Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
360. oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system Maintenance Schedule 6 3 If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service the vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 15 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that the first service be Maintenance I the second service be Maintenance II and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often 6 4 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance I Use Maintenance II Use message displays 10 months or Maintenance I if the CHANGE Maintenance II if the previous more since the last service or if the ENGINE OIL SOON message service performed was message has not come on at all for displays within 10 months since the Maintenance I Always use one year vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II whenever the Maintenance II was performed Schedul
361. ollowing statements are true e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if the vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace the tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires
362. ombined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer Driving Your Vehicle 4 33 earlier in this section Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in Tow Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load 4 34 Parking on Hills Driving Your Vehicle Z CAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface wrong the rig could start to move If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into tr
363. omething longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of the vehicle Features and Controls If you have the luggage carrier you can load things on top of your vehicle Crossrails are not standard on this vehicle and must be purchased at your dealer retailer Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving check to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened Rear Seat Armrest Vehicles with a rear seat armrest have two cupholders Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to access the cupholders Convenience Net Use the convenience net located in the rear to store small loads as far forward as possible The net should not be used to store heavy loads Cargo Cover For vehicles with a cargo cover it can be used to cover items in the rear of the vehicle To install the cover place the loops on each corner of the cover on the four hooks in the rear of the vehicle The cover should be stored securely when not in use Cargo Tie Downs Four car
364. one Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Multi Band Antenna The multi band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle This type of antenna is used with the AM FM radio as well as OnStar and the XM Satellite Radio Service System if the vehicle has these features Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can interfere with the performance of the radio system and if the vehicle has this feature OnStar Make sure the multi band antenna is not obstructed Instrument Panel 3 127 3 128 Instrument Panel 4 NOTES 4 1 Driving Your Vehicle Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving the Road the Vehicle Driving for Better Fuel ECONOMY sseeg 4 1 Defensive Driving Drunk Driving 0cceeeeeeees 4 2 Control of a Vehicle 4 3 Braking ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 4 3 Antilock Brake System ABS ceseeceee 4 4 Braking in Emergencies
365. ong enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 23 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat e Does the lap belt fit low and snug Seats and Restraint System 1 29 Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip I
366. ons on page 3 65 1 8 Seats and Restraint System Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks Z CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving Z CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining seatbacks the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seatback do the following 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Power Reclining Seatbacks In vehicles with seats that have power reclining seatbacks the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power s
367. ont passenger passengers behind the driver and right front passenger and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows Z CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat mounted side impact airbag Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked Seats and Restraint System When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is n
368. ontrols and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required The following can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed e Avoid hard accelerations e Avoid steep uphill grades e If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by checking the following items e Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been l
369. or ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes e The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different e The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage Continued e The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired e There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle e Drive it only with the windows completely down e Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage ora building that has no fresh air ventilation Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Z CAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Z CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Par
370. or vents In this mode outside air is pulled inside the vehicle The air conditioning system runs automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is less than 40 F 4 C Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear While in defrost mode if the PASS button is pressed the PASS button indicator flashes three times to show that the passenger climate control system cannot be activated If the passenger temperature buttons are adjusted while in defrost mode the driver temperature indicator will change The passenger temperature will not be displayed Air Conditioning X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning A C on and off An indicator light comes on when A C is on The A C does not work when the outside temperature is below 40 F 4 C If X is pressed the indicator flashes three times and turns off to show that the A C mode is not available If the A C is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the A C indicator turns off to show that the A C mode has been canceled Instrument Panel 3 25 On hot days open the windows briefly to let hot inside air escape This helps reduce the time it takes for the interior of the vehicle to cool down The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off
371. oratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the Service and Appearance Care material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on asmooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loos
372. ors 3 30 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 3 56 Hazard Warning Flashers 3 5 Safety and Symbols iii Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance nites 5 58 Different Size 0 5 56 Replacement 00 5 59 When It Is Time for New Tires cccceeeee eens 5 54 Where to Put the Child Restraint oceniono 1 35 WINDOWS lt 22cecscoced sahemahedsdamens 2 14 POWEOM scenie bhbcczne reacted hone 2 14 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning 5 88 Washer srota nenie 3 8 Washer Fluid 0 5 26 Windshield cont Wiper Blade Replacement 5 38 Wiper Fuses scce 5 92 WIPGIS o Zertan 3 7 Winter Driving 8 4 15 Wipers Rear Washer aa 3 9 Wiring High Voltage DEVICES ranoni otia 5 91 X XM Radio Messages 3 102 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment saae 6 1
373. ortion can occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only aclean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage could result Rear Seat Audio RSA For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio RSA rear seat passengers can listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources The rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to except on some radios where dual control is allowed For example rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is off The front audio system displays O when the RSA is on and disappears from the display when it is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If the vehicl
374. ost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranties in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled
375. ot based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down 1 51 Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e Ifthe vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e Ifthe vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e Ifthe vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts 1 52 In addition the vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs
376. other messages when an error occurs Optical Error The disc was inserted upside down Disk Read Error A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems e It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem Using the DVD Player The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the remote control the RSA system or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 and Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 123 for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R
377. outlined in Steps 1 and 2 General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge 7 3 For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 Alternatively you may call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 1999 or you may write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 4 Customer Assistance Information Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com saturn Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place e Digital owner manual warranty information and more e Onl
378. ower the seat move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height 1 4 Seats and Restraint System Power Seats Driver Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown gt Power Seat Adjustment Control B Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 8 C Power Lumbar on page 1 5 If the vehicle has power seats the controls are located on the outboard side of the seats Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the power seat adjustment control A forward or rearward The vehicle may have additional features to adjust the power seat e Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat adjustment control A up or down e Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down e Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down The vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1 6 for more information Manual Lumbar If the vehicle has this feature the handle is located on the inboard side of the seatback See Manual Seats on page 1 3 for more information Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbar support Turn the handle forward to increase lumbar support The lumbar support may need to be adjusted when changing the seating position Power Lumbar If the seats have power lumbar
379. ower Liftgate on page 2 11 2 Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one Remove the two taillamp hex nut covers Remove the two hex nuts holding the taillamp assembly in place Pull out the taillamp assembly Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it Replace the old bulb with a new one Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp assembly When reinstalling the taillamp assembly make sure the plastic pin on the taillamp assembly lines up and is inserted correctly into the opening of the vehicle Service and Appearance Care License Plate Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the liftgate trim oe Ue si 2 Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 5 37 4 Install the new bulb 5 Reverse steps 1 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp Replacement Bulbs Bulb Number Exterior Lamp License Plate Lamp Rear Sidemarker Lamp Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps 3157K For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer 5 38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information Replacemen
380. owing 5 64 Service and Appearance Care Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes This will help to inflate the tire faster Always do a safety check first See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 61 Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5 70 Unwrap the sealant air hose F and the power plug H Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise Attach the sealant air hose F onto the tire valve stem Turn it clockwise until it is tight Plug the power plug H into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 17 If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the cigarette lighter Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window Service and Appearance Care 5 65 Start the vehicle Th
381. p Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment KI This light comes on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer 3 40 Instrument Panel If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice lf the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission c
382. page 3 56 Battery Run Down Protection This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained if the interior courtesy lamps reading map lamps visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally left on If any of these lamps are left on they automatically turn off after 10 minutes if the ignition is off The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs e The ignition is turned on The exterior lamps control is turned off then on again The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes if they are manually turned on with the ignition on or off Accessory Power Outlet s The vehicle has three 12 volt outlets which can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone a compact disc player etc The power outlets are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls at the rear of the center console and in the rear cargo area Lift the cover to access the outlet Close the cover when not using the outlet Notice Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery Power is always supplied to the outlets Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle and adapter fuses If a problem is experie
383. page 3 65 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time press one of the power seat controls memory buttons or power mirror buttons If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling a memory position the driver seat recall may stop working If this happens press the appropriate control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds after the obstruction is removed Then try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not being recalled see your dealer retailer for service Seats and Restraint System 1 7 Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver door panel between buttons 1 and 2 With the vehicle in P Park the exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button You will hear a single beep The driver seat will move back If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver Information Center DIC automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition See EASY EXIT SEAT under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for more information Further programming for the memory seat feature can be done using the DIC You can select or cancel the following e The automatic easy exit seat feature e The remote memory seat recall feature For programming information see DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Butt
384. pecific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station Playing the Radio 5 Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume For vehicles with a Rear Entertainment System RSE press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and RSE system and to start the parental control feature Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol displays next to the clock display while the parental control feature is being used The feature remains on until D is pressed and held for more than two seconds or the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle i Information Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is in the OFF position press i to display the time For vehicles with XM MP3 WMA or RDS features press Ito display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 or WMA song If information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback the song title information displays on the top line o
385. pedal If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive the brake system warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 2 28 Shifting Into Park Z CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 26 Features and Controls 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running Z CAUTION 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 27 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into P Park by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake
386. playlists have a m3u wpl or pls extension as other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names ora combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions To play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player 3 98 Instrument Panel Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW disc is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R or CD RW disc
387. pped also displays on the DIC when viewing the trip and fuel information The outside air temperature automatically appears in the top right corner of the DIC display If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display the numbers will be replaced with dashes If this occurs have the vehicle serviced The compass will be shown in the bottom right corner of the DIC display See D C Compass on page 3 54 for more information If your vehicle has DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for the displays available If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons later in this section for the displays available DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons If your vehicle has DIC buttons the information below explains the operation of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel See nstrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 for more information The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for more information If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can also use the
388. pull the cover off to access the storage compartment Service and Appearance Care 2 Press the two tabs on the quick release buckle to release the tire sealant and compressor kit strap 3 Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its tray To store the tire sealant and compressor kit reverse the steps Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 5 Z CAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in P Park 3 Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised 4 Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A A i 8 a Tog S ay h wl A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following informatio
389. r steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce the vehicle speed to around 55 mph 88 km h to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating Tow Haul Mode Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load The purpose of the Tow Haul mode is to e Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load e Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded e Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load e Increase the charging system voltage to assist in recharging a battery installed in a trailer Press this button located on the console to turn on and turn off the Tow Haul mode The Tow Haul light on the instrument panel will come on to indicate that Tow Haul mode has been selected Tow Haul may be turned off by pressing the button again at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow Haul every time it is started Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer c
390. r conditioning buttons are pressed Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic The system automatically controls the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed To use automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the current temperature s selected and AUTO is shown on the display The current air delivery mode and fan speed also appear for approximately five seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning and air inlet are automatically controlled The air conditioning runs when the outside temperature is over 40 F 4 C The system is automatically set to outside air unless it is hot outside and then the air inlet changes to recirculation mode to help quickly cool the vehicle The recirculation indicator light will come on 2 Set the temperature for the driver and passenger To find a comfortable setting start with a 73 F 22 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver s side or passenger side temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary The system will remain at the selected setting Choosing the warmest or coolest temperatures does not cause the vehicle to heat or cool more quickly To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system delays turning on the fan until warm air is available Press the fan control to override this delay and select the fan speed Instrument Panel 3 23
391. r feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW disc To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows To listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play
392. r more information The number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that the transmission will be allowed to operate in This means that all gears below that number are available For example when 4 Fourth is shown next to the L 1 First through 4 Fourth gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle The transmission will not shift into 5 Fifth until the Plus button is used or you shift back into D Drive While in L Low the transmission will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high You have a brief period of time to slow the vehicle If vehicle speed is not reduced within the time allowed the lower gear range shift will not be completed You must further slow the vehicle then press the Minus button to the desired lower gear range Automatic Engine Grade braking is not available when the ERS is active It is available in D Drive for both normal and Tow Haul mode While using the ERS cruise control and the tow haul mode can be used See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 26 for more information Tow Haul Mode EEE Tow Haul The vehicle may have a Tow Haul mode The button is located on the instrument panel under the climate controls Push the button to activate the system Push it again to deactivate the system You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load When Tow Haul is activated the Tow Haul symbol will come on the instrument pan
393. rability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty 7 12 Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Customer Assistance Information Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assu
394. rash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 17 e Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ON fs i l United States Seats and Restraint System E Ai He Canada A The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off are visible during the system check If you are using remote start if equipped to start the vehicle from a distance you may not see the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 34 1 55 The passenger sensing system turns off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag seat mounted side impact airbags and the roof rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a p
395. rasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 34 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 and DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 45 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 50 for more information REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 4 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE A C Air Conditioning SYSTEM This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating sy
396. rclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature of the air flowing from the system Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode By positioning the right knob between two modes a combination of those two modes is selected 7 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets 74 Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets 3 20 Instrument Panel td Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air Recirculation cannot be selected while in floor mode Ni Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When this mode is selected the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning unless the outside temperature is less than 40 F 4 C Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear W Defrost This mode quickly clears the windshield of fog or frost Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents with some to the floor vents In this mode outside air i
397. re information Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Auxiliary Jack or Rear Auxiliary Jack Press D to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing BAND or DVD CD AUX to select the CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged into the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for more information In some vehicles depending on audio options the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned on See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 123 for more information Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc The radio has the capability of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages CHECK DISC Radios with a Single CD player display CHECK DISC and or ejects the CD if an error occurs Radios with a CD and DVD player may display
398. re positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 52 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 46 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 for more information This message clears itself after 10 seconds TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays and a chime sounds if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position WASHER FLUID LOW AD
399. re tire on the vehicle when the Antilock Brake System ABS warning light comes on or when the rear differential fluid is overheating This message turns off when the differential fluid cools The AWD system is disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced by a full size tire If the warning message is still on after putting on the full size tire you need to reset the warning message To reset the warning message turn the ignition off and then back on again after 30 seconds If the message stays on see your dealer retailer right away See All Wheel Drive AWD System on page 4 8 for more information AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off This message clears itself after 10 seconds AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on This message clears itself after 10 seconds BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message displays when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping below expected levels The battery saver system starts reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice At the point that the features are disabled this message is displayed It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON T
400. reate a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane Service and Appearance Care A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place and stopping 1 Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 5 2 Park the vehicle Set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in P Park 3 Turn off the engine 4 Inspect the flat tire 5 61 Z CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire This vehicle may come wi
401. remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position 1 47 Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger e A seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver e A seat mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger e A roof rail airbag for the driver passenger seated directly behind the driver and the third row outboard passenger position e A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position 1 48 All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With seat mounted side impact airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Sea
402. res repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash e Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured e lf there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer e Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your
403. ric fan Z CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap evena little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Continued Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap If coolant is needed add the proper mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done 1 Detach fasteners and lift off the panel that covers the radiator cap including the upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left in the system Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture When coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure to secure it tightly Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL COLD mark Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off Service and Appearance Care Ll lo Ce na 8 Start the engine and let it run
404. rive the vehicle until all the windows are clear For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors fog or frost is cleared from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Sensors The solar sensor located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel monitors the solar heat Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly ha ii The interior temperature sensor located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering column measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the temperature fan speed and the air delivery mode The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures Outlet Adjustment
405. rking the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control O button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio s on page 3 75 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place Remote Control Buttons D Power Press to turn the video screen on and off Y Illumination Press to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on Title Press to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function could vary for each disc Main Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A V lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt t Enter Press to select the c
406. rm Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 57 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Service and Appearance Care Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing e Too much heat e Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear
407. roperly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size 1 56 We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding ina rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina Continued Seats and Restraint System CAUTION Continued forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though th
408. ror cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 102 later in this section for further detail Playing a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing Playing a CD In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the
409. rque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications Service and Appearance Care Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98 for the wheel nut torque specification 5 77 14 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown Notice Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle s compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare the cover or the spare could be damaged 5 78 Service and Appearance Care Secondary Latch System This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that has a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged For the secondary latch to work the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 80 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly Z CAUTION Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instr
410. rrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Service and Appearance Care Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and
411. rs and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 1 If the vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 56 for additional important information Seats and Restraint System Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system A If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 1 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 61 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder
412. rs of Canada Limited CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 7 15 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals A variety of publications are available to you Saturn service manuals are written for trained technicians and in some cases specialized tools and equipment are necessary to complete certain repairs However the manuals are available to owners who either have the training or wish to gain a greater understanding of the technical aspect of their Saturn For additional publications information or to order publications in the United States call toll free 1 800 2 SATURN or visit Saturn publications com to order on line In Canada Saturn service manuals are available by calling toll free 1 800 551 4123 7 16 Owner Publications Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as described below is applicable only in the fifty U S states and the District of Columbia and only for cars and light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR less than 10 000 pounds 4 536 kg Copies of individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer You can ask to see them In Canada information relating to product service bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn retailer Service Bulletins Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service bulletins about Saturn products Saturn monitors product performance in the field We then pr
413. rs on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels 5 89 Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes 5 90 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti co
414. s Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by e Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt e Heat and sun e Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Service and Appearance Care Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleane
415. s This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent This vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system To activate the theft deterrent system do one of the following Press on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the power door lock switch when any door is open a The security light flashes When the door is closed the security light stops flashing and stays on solid for approximately 30 seconds The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If the delayed locking feature is active the alarm is not activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off Press when the driver door is closed The security light comes on solid for approximately 30 seconds and then goes off The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off The theft deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle s key or the manual door lock If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a ten second pre alarm occurs The horn chirps and the lights flash If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing o during the ten second pre alarm the alarm goes off The headlamps flash and the horn sounds for about two minutes then turns off to save the battery power
416. s always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 1 14 Z CAUTION Drunk Driving Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition e Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you e Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Z CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driv
417. s and add on convex mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance Turn Signal Indicator The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that is built into the mirror housing The turn signal lamp flashes with the use of the vehicle s turn signal and hazard flashers Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have the controls located on the driver door armrest Mirror Adjustment 1 Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position 2 Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position Features and Controls Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if e The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded e The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power foldaway mirrors This sound is normal after a manual folding operation 2 33 Automatic Dimming Feature The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 31 for information on how to turn this feature on Turn Signal Indicator The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that is built into the mirror housing The turn signal lamp flashes with the use
418. s but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Driving Your Vehicle 4 15 Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces 4 16 Driving Your Vehicle Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be ina serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 5 e Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Continued If the vehicle is stuck in the snow e Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe e Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there e Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fres
419. s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs Seats and Restraint System 1 33 Z CAUTION Z CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body are
420. s a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel 3 31 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument cluster is designed show how the vehicle is running It shows how fast the vehicle is going about how much fuel has been used and many other things needed drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada similar 3 32 Instrument Panel Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle s speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed the new one is set to the mileage total of the old odometer If this is not possible it is set at zero and a label is put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed If the mileag
421. s and Controls 4 NOTES Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 Hazard Warning Flashers 3 5 ORM M Ee NE EE EEEIEE 3 5 Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel stinnaceaerceacucanickeassrnnts 3 6 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever occ cceccccceceee cesses eueeeeeeues 3 6 Turn and Lane Change Sigal S reeniri aiia 3 6 Headlamp High Low Beam Changan seichc citetan datedackcies 3 7 Flash to Pass ssceceeceeeeeeeees 3 7 Windshield Wipers 6 3 7 Windshield Washer 3 8 Rear Window Wiper Washer 3 9 Cruise Control 3 9 Exterior Lamps 3 11 Delayed Headlamps 3 12 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Automatic Headlamp System 3 12 Fog Lamps ic sectersin lt dhencesnes 3 13 Instrument Panel Brightness seeeeeeeeeeeeee Courtesy Lamps Dome Lamps Dome Lamp Override Entry Lighting eese Delayed Entry Lighting Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming eseese Reading Lamps Electric Power Management Battery Run Down Protection Accessory Power Outlet s Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current Climate Conirols Climate Control System Dual Automatic Climate Control System Outlet Adjustment Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate CONTONS iisiseeccceancccenteseauncud Instrument Panel 3 1 Warning Lights Gages and Ind
422. s lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 83 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 61 Service and Appearance Care B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load 5 41 E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all fed
423. s on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle To open the fuel door push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door Z CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on
424. s or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Q What is wrong with this A The belt is twisted across the body Z CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached see Third Row Seats on page 1 12 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini buckle The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index Seats and Restraint System 1 23 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again IW
425. s pulled inside the vehicle Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning system runs automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is less than 40 F 4 C Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on when A C is on The air conditioning system does not operate when the outside temperature is below 40 F 4 C The indicator light flashes three times and turns off when outside conditions affect air conditioning operation This is normal For quicker cool down on hot days 1 Open the windows to let hot air escape Select 7 mode Select Select the coolest temperature Select the highest fan speed Par wo N Close the windows after the hot air has escaped 7 Once the vehicle s interior temperature is below the outside temperature select lt mode for faster cooling Using recirculation for long periods of time could cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry To prevent this from happening after the inside of the vehicle has cooled turn the recirculation mode off The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or o
426. senger side Remove the bolts from the holes in the floor before installing the seats Seats and Restraint System 2 Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the front seat hooks are on the vehicle bars Reinstall the bolts and torque to 55 Nem 41 Ib ft Pull up on the seat to make sure it is locked in place Raise the seatback to its upright position Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked into place Push the headrest up into position Push and pull on the headrest to make sure it is locked into place Reconnect the center safety belt mini latch to the mini buckle Do not let it twist Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts Z CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too Z CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision
427. shbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playback Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck pressing the CAT category button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA MP3 WMA Format To create an MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player upper slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playlists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or aloum should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in Instrument Panel 3 97 order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure
428. small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1Mo72675 BUA UM A a This is the legal identifier for the vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 98 for the vehicle s engine code Service and Appearance Care Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if parts need to be ordered The label has the following information e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 5 91 Electrical System High Voltage Devices and Wiring Z CAU
429. ss amp Instrument Panel Brightness The knob with this symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps control to the left of the steering wheel Push the knob in all the way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights Push the knob back in when finished Courtesy Lamps When a door is opened the courtesy lamps automatically come on They make it easier when entering and exiting the vehicle The lamps can also be turned on manually by fully turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise The reading lamps located on the headliner above the rearview mirror can be turned on or off independent of the automatic courtesy lamps when the doors are closed 3 14 Instrument Panel Dome Lamps The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is opened unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the farthest position Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain off or come on automatically when a door is opened p g Dome Lamp Override Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened
430. ss has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet 5 86 Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather Service and Appearance Care Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic
431. ssorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 60 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals 5 4 Service and Appearance Care California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www disc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work Z CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task e Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners
432. stem display in the rearview mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one of the following conditions If this occurs the left indicator light on the mirror will flash e A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal or no video signal present during the reverse cycle e A fast flash may indicate that the display has been on for the maximum allowable time during a reverse cycle or the display has reached an Over Temperature limit The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video device from high temperature conditions Once conditions return to normal the device will reset and the green indicator will stop flashing During any of these fault conditions the display will be blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as the vehicle is in R Reverse or until the conditions return to normal Pressing and holding when the left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light 2 42 OnStar System aaa m a OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors
433. stems are no longer working Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency Instrument Panel 3 61 SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 33 and Airbag System on page 1 47 for more information SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays if there is a problem with this system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle after 30 seconds and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the AWD system needs service See your dealer retailer 3 62 Instrument Panel SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 35 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the
434. sult of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Continued Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle s tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire s tread is badly worn or if your vehicle s tires have been damaged replace them 5 40 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall A wr vein a A aan azy SE Passenger P Metric Tire Example A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description Service and Appearance Care See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteri
435. system can also be turned off by pressing and holding the button Instrument Panel 3 29 Mimic Mode This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control settings It comes on when REAR is pressed Independent Mode This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls It comes on when any rear control is adjusted Fan Control Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed Temperature Control Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature The temperature settings will display in 0 12 increments going from the coolest 0 to the warmest 12 setting 3 30 Instrument Panel M Air Delivery Mode Control Press to manually change the direction of the airflow Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display 7a Vent Air is directed through the overhead outlets i74 Bi Level Air is directed through the rear floor outlets as well as the overhead outlets td Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets The rear system floor outlets are located under the third row seats Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or i
436. system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired Instrument Panel 3 105 Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth Th
437. t Trailer Rating Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 lbs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 lbs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg 4 30 If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 lbs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 2 700 Ibs 1225 kg 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered Driving Your Vehicle Because the
438. t blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To replace the wiper blade assembly 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield Service and Appearance Care 2 Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm connector and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector 3 Install the new wiper blade and make sure the wiper blade locks into place For the proper size and type see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 Backglass Wiper Blade To replace the backglass wiper blade 1 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 2 Rotate the wiper blade assembly hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm 3 Replace the wiper blade 4 Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the rest position on the glass Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer Service and Appearance Care 5 39 Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your vehicle s tires can cause overheating as a re
439. t cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Features and Controls This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation This vehicle has PASS Key III Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses an incorrect key the vehicle does not start Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine do
440. t into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 2 Restart the vehicle The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child s seating posture and body build It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Seats and Restraint System If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult Size Occupant If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger
441. t may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 3 114 Instrument Panel Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See Radio s on page 3 75 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might or might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE syste
442. t on page 1 35 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 43 J N 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 44 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock Seats and Restraint System 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is Secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
443. t the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF UNITS To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park Press the trip odometer reset stem until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected Instrument Panel 3 53 DISPLAY LANGUAGE To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE displays 2 Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages The available languages are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE 3 Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice
444. tainer while it is inside a vehicle ina vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Continued Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Checking Things Under the Hood Z CAUTION An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Z CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the hood release handle with this symbol on it It is located under the instrument panel on the driver s side of the vehicle Service and Appearance Care 2 At the front of the vehicle pull up on the center of the hood and push the secondary hood release to the right 3 After you have partially lifted the hood gas struts will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood in the fully open position Before closing the hood be sure
445. tation costs Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every retailer Please contact your retailer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate retailer personnel Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged ha
446. tem TCS Disable Button If Equipped See StabiliTrak System on page 4 5 Tow Haul Mode on page 2 26 If Equipped Power Liftgate on page 2 11 If Equipped Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 17 Heated Seats on page 1 5 Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 Glove Box on page 2 50 Instrument Panel 3 5 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on the instrument panel below the audio system to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off The turn signals do not work while the hazard warning flashers are on Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn 3 6 Instrument Panel Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in or out Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer SW Windshield Wipers
447. tem Check Z CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 27 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park e The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check Maintenance Schedule Z CAUTION When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move
448. tems ODOMETER Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer To switch between English and metric measurements see UNITS earlier in this section TRIP A and TRIP B Press the trip fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for each trip odometer Both trip odometers can be used at the same time Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometers Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For examp
449. th ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system The brake master cylinder reservoir to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down e The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up e A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Z CAUTION If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid o
450. th a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit To use the jack and spare tire see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 To use the tire sealant and compressor kit see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 62 5 62 Service and Appearance Care Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Over inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure Do not exceed the recommended pressure Z CAUTION Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit there may not be a spare tire tire changing equipment and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire
451. that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 22 Driving Your Vehicle Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label Z CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label A A ja TFE era UOA DAR i FORINT ors eama ee ones bees oe bared Se ae rnana m pa m e OLE Example Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar of your vehicle With the drivers door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle
452. the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or ina booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Seats and Restraint System Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint Z CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear f
453. the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 47 rt This light will come on and stay on for several seconds when the vehicle is started Then the light should go out If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle has been started or comes on when while driving the airbag system may not work properly Have the vehicle serviced right away Instrument Panel 3 33 Z CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away 3 34 Instrument Panel Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has a passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 for important safety information The instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator ka PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF On p United States Ms Be Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system chec
454. the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but not falling off of the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Ni Wh To move it down push down on the button A and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the height adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After the adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it down without pushing the button to make sure it has locked into position Seats and Restraint System Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And for vehicles with side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event 1 25 Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 62 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt
455. tic spare tire heat shield by pulling the rubber latch Store the plastic spare tire heat shield See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 80 for more information Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth ora paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 10 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 11 Place the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface 12 Put the nuts on by hand by turning the clockwise until the wheel is held against the mounting surface Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel 13 Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely Z CAUTION Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper to
456. tness of the screen Q Contrast Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen Features and Controls Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist URPA system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on the Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable error message may display See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 34 The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen 2 39 To turn the symbols on or off 1 Make sure that URPA has not been disabled 2 Shift into P Park 3 Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Display screen button 4 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display 5 Touch the Symbols screen button The screen button will be highlighted when on 2 40 Rear Vision Camera Error Messages Service Rear Vision Camera System This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems If any other problem occurs or if a problem pers
457. to R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed after a delay Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off To turn the rear vision camera system on or off 1 Shift into P Park 2 Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button 3 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen displays Raw Camana Optians 4 Select the Video screen button When the Video screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on The delay that is received after shifting out of R Reverse is approximately 10 seconds The delay can be cancelled by performing one of the following e Pressing a hard key on the navigation system e Shifting in to P Park e Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph 8 km h There is a message on the rear vision camera screen that states Check Surroundings for Safety Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen Brightness Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the brigh
458. transmitter at the vehicle and press Q until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be started using the remote start feature two separate times between driving sequences The engine runs for 10 minutes after each remote start Or the engine run time can be extended another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if and then Q are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The additional 10 minutes are considered a second remote start The vehicle must be started with the key once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done The vehicle can be started using the remote start feature again after the key is removed from the ignition The vehicle cannot be started using the remote start feature if the key is in the ignition the hood is open or if there is an emission control system malfunction Features and Controls 2 7 The engine turns off during a remote start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC if the ve
459. trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and trip odometers Instrument Panel 3 45 DIC Buttons The buttons are the set reset customization vehicle information and trip fuel buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 for more information 3 46 Instrument Panel i Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life park assist on vehicles with this feature units tire pressure readings on vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming and compass calibration and zone setting on vehicles with this feature ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometers fuel range average economy timer fuel used and average speed Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items OIL LIFE Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life
460. tro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of miles mi or kilometers km that were driven during the last ignition cycle 3 52 Instrument Panel OIL LIFE To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 5 13 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 3 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see
461. tructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 87 A trailer was attached to the vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the last drive cycle the red light may illuminate in the rear display Once the attached object is removed URPA will return to normal operation e A tow bar is attached to the vehicle e The vehicle s bumper is damaged Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer to repair the system e Other conditions may affect system performance such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If the system is still disabled after driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h take the vehicle to your dealer retailer Rear Vision Camera RVC The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system Read this entire section before using it Features and Controls CAUTION Continued Z CAUTION The Rear Vision Camera RVC system does not replace driver vision RVC does not e Detect objects that are outside the camera s field of view below the bumper or underneath the vehicle e Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets Continued Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear vision camera screen or use the screen during longer higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross traffic Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances So if
462. ts Proper Lap Shoulder Belt Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety Belt Extender Child Restraints Older Children Infants and Young Children Child Restraint Systems Where to Put the Restraint Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Airbag System Airbag System Where Are the Airbags When Should an Airbag Inflate What Makes an Airbag Inflate How Does an Airbag Restrain What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates Passenger Sensing System Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Resiraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1 2 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints The vehicle s front seats have adjustable head restraints in all outboard seating positions Z CAUTION With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck spinal injury in a crash Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash z Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the
463. ts and Restraint System Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system Z CAUTION Z CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 51 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat mounted side impact airbags and or roo
464. tting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new Saturn original equipment wheel Tire Chains Z CAUTION CAUTION Continued Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Continued Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain the tires properly See Tires on page 5 39 f air goes out of a tire It is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will c
465. u momentarily to switch to high beam to signal that you are going to pass If the headlamps are on they will return to low beam when the lever is released For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps the flash to pass feature does not work while the Daytime Running Lamps DRL are on Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers WW Mist Turn the band to mist for a single wiping cycle and then release The wipers stop after one wipe Hold the band on longer for more wipe cycles Instrument Panel 3 7 O Off Turns the wipers off i Delay Adjusts the delay time The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever 1 Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed 2 High Speed For steady wiping at high speed Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If the blades are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If they become damaged install new blades or blade inserts See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 38 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers A circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools 3 8 Instrument Panel Windshield Washer Washer Fluid Press the button located at the end of the turn signal multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the w
466. uctions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next To release the spare tire from the secondary latch Z CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare 1 If the cable is not visible start this procedure at Step 3 ff a T All Wheel Drive Vehicle shown 2 Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed Attach the lug wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns Place the jack under the vehicle ahead of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 5 Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring 6 Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place This lets you know that the secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack 7 Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack Service and Appearance Care 8 Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one han
467. uid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary 6 10 At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire if the vehicle has one See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 45 If the vehicle has a spare tire check to make sure it is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 70 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 52 Maintenance Schedule At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check Z CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 27 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer retailer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Sys
468. ure allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice See Delayed Locking on page 2 8 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK O
469. ure will turn off To turn the heated seat feature back on press the desired button 1 6 Seats and Restraint System Memory Seat and Mirrors On vehicles with the memory package the controls for this feature are located on the driver door panel The controls are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver seat and outside mirrors To save positions in memory 1 Adjust the driver seat including the seatback recliner and both outside mirrors to a comfortable position See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2 32 for more information Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall the mirror positions 2 Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know that the position has been stored A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in P Park Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat and outside mirrors will move to the position previously stored You will hear a single beep Using the RKE transmitter to enter the vehicle with the remote recall memory feature on causes automatic seat and mirror adjustment There is no adjustment when the position has not been changed by another seating position or the easy exit feature See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on
470. us indicator should light and stay lit Seats and Restraint System when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 34 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock AY f c Fa 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Seats and Restraint System If the airbags are off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 for more information To
471. use the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering Driving Your Vehicle When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving on Grades Because of the added load of the trailer the vehicle s engine may overheat on hot days when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer If the engine coolant temperature gage indicates overheating turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load pull off the road and stop ina safe spot Let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long o
472. utiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 18 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method Driving Your Vehicle 4 17 Z CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 60 4 18 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If
473. uture listening For the radio with CD and DVD press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to select between CD or Auxiliary e When a CD is in the player the CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays e f an auxiliary input device is not connected No Input Device Found displays Instrument Panel 3 85 DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to select between DVD CD or Auxiliary e Ifan auxiliary input device is not connected No Aux Input Device displays e When a disc is in either slot the DVD CD text label anda message showing the track or chapter number displays e Ifan auxiliary input device is not connected and a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button only cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device e Ifa front auxiliary input device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options 3 86 Instrument Panel If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to only navigate the CD tracks through the remote control See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 114 for mo
474. ve the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Customer Assistance Information Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty 7 11 Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature du
475. vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance Customer Assistance Information company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time 7 13 e Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recom
476. vehicle The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 10 psi 68 kPa from the recommended inflation pressure inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure Wipe off any sealant from the wheel tire and vehicle Dispose of the used sealant canister E and sealant air hose F assembly at a local dealer retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer retailer Service and Appearance Care 5 67 23 After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit take the vehicle to an authorized dealer retailer within a 100 miles 161 km of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant bh Do E 5 68 Always do a safety check first See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 61 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5 70 2 Unwrap the air only hose G and the power plug H 3 Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it Service and Appe
477. vehicle serviced as soon as possible 3 36 Instrument Panel Brake System Warning Light This vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop the vehicle For good braking both parts need to be working If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have the brake system inspected right away BRAKE OP United States Canada This light should come on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem This light may also come on due to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 5 27 for more information When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when the parking brake is set The light will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released it means there is a brake problem If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully Make sure the parking brake is fully released The pedal may be harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 22 Z CAUTION The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake syst
478. ver allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Seats and Restraint System Z CAUTION Z CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
479. ver an armrest Z CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Seats and Restraint System 1 21 Q What is wrong with this A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times Z CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 1 22 Seats and Restraint System Q What is wrong with this A The belt is behind the body Z CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause seriou
480. w A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened when the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on e Parking Lamps e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights 40 Fog Lamps If Equipped Turns on the fog lamps See Fog Lamps on page 3 13 Delayed Headlamps Delayed headlamps provide a period of exterior lighting as you leave the area around your vehicle This feature is activated when the headlamps are on due to the automatic headlamps control feature and when the ignition is turned off The headlamps remain on until the exterior lamps control is moved to the parking lamps position or until the pre selected delayed headlamp lighting period has ended If the ignition is turned off with the headlamps switch in the parking lamps or headlamps position the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change the time of delay see DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 65 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Automatic Headlamp System Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system makes either the low beam headlamps come on ata reduced brightness or the DRL lights for vehicles with High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the following conditions are met
481. y which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 18 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity If a weight carrying hitch or a weight distributing hitch is being used the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 lbs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs Driving Your Vehicle 4 29 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg GCWR Vehicle Weigh
482. y if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and stability control the performance of these systems can be affected Z CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use Saturn specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a Saturn certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 54 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States Service and Appearance Care The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim d
483. y a tone 3 Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete e If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them Instrument Panel 3 107 4 After the complete number has been entered say Store The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e Ifthe name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e Ifthe name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 3 108 Instrument Panel Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following co
484. y as the engine is started If it does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem Security Light ain This light flashes when the security system is activated For more information see Theft Deterrent Systems on page 2 16 Fog Lamp Light 0 On vehicles with fog lamps this light comes on when the fog lamps are in use The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 13 for more information Cruise Control Light This light comes on whenever the cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 9 for more information Highbeam On Light D The highbeam on light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use Instrument Panel 3 43 See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 7 for more information Tow Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 2 26 3 44 Instrument Panel Fuel Gage Canada United States When the ignition is on the fuel gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on The gage will first indic
485. y decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Customer Assistance Information Services Provided e Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station e Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given e Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in sand mud or snow 7 7 Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car 7 8 Customer Assistance Information Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance e Impound towing c
486. you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the RVC system always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around the vehicle 2 37 Vehicles Without Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the key is in the ON RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the inside rear view mirror Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the video image automatically disappears from the inside rearview mirror Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off or On To turn off the rear vision camera system press and hold located on the inside rearview mirror until the left indicator light turns off The rear vision camera display is now disabled 2 38 Features and Controls To turn the rear vision camera system on again press and hold until the left indicator light illuminates The rear vision camera system display is now enabled and the display will appear in the mirror normally Vehicles With Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the driver shifts the vehicle in
487. ystem responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number e If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number followed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 4 After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e Ifthe name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e Ifthe name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold amp amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed b
488. ything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change the vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim front sensors side impact sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 55 If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbe

caution - Saturn

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents